Radio Fine Tuning_B9
Transcript of Radio Fine Tuning_B9
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 1/331
© Alcatel 1
© All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document,use and communication of its contents not permitted without
written authorization from Alcatel.
Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS release B9
TRAINING MANUAL3FL10493ACAAWBZZA ed 2 – November 2005
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 2/331
© Alcatel 2
Safety Warning
Both lethal and dangerous voltages are present within the equipment. Do not wear conductive jewelry while working on the equipment.Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone.
Caution
The equipment used during this course is electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.
Trade Marks
Alcatel and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel.
All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders including Alcatel. Users are not permittedto use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not arepresentation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark.
Copyright
This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel and may be used for training purposes only. No other use or transmission ofall or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel’s written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices.No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any mannerwhatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel.
Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable Canadian or other legislation is hereby expresslyprohibited.
User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or describes, and is expresslyprohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express written consent of Alcatel.
Alcatel, The Alcatel logo, MainStreet and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information
presented, which is subject to change without notice. © 2004 Alcatel. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
In no event will Alcatel be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including lost profits, lost business orlost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not Alcatel has been advised of the possibility of suchdamages.
Mention of non-Alcatel products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation.
Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel for current information concerning Alcatel equipment and its operation.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 3/331
© Alcatel 3
Contents
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS 15
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS 46
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS 194
4 ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR 238
5 CASE STUDIES 267
6 ANNEX 288
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 4/331
© Alcatel 4
Page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 5/331
© Alcatel 5
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 6/331
© Alcatel 6
6@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMSSession presentation
> Objective: to be able to characterize typical radio problems in order totrigger an intervention of the appropriate team
> Program:
1.1 Theoretical presentation
1.2 Coverage problem
1.3 Interference problem
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problem
1.5 TCH Congestion problem
1.6 Deducing the right team for intervention
1.7 Exercises
S1: TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMSS2: ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS
S3: OMC-R RADIO PARAMETERS
S4: ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
S5: CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 7/331
© Alcatel 7
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.1 Theoretical presentation
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 8/331
© Alcatel 8
8@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Several sources of information can alert RFTM team:
• QoS indicators
• Customers complaints
• Drive tests
• Other teams information (NSS statistics)
> As many symptoms are common to several causes, it can benecessary to:
• Consolidate standard sources of information
• Carryout specific examinations
• Deduce the appropriate team for intervention
1.1 Theoretical presentationJustification
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 9/331
© Alcatel 9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.2 Coverage problem
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 10/331
© Alcatel 10
10@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Definition: Bad coverage
• A network or cell facing coverage problems presents a badRxLev and RxQual in the same time on some areas.
> Symptoms:
• Customers complain about dropped calls or/and “no network”
• OMC QoS indicators
– TCH failure rate
– Call drop rate
– Low proportion of better cell HO – High rate of DL quality HO
• A interface indicators
– High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interfacefailure
1.2 Coverage problemDefinition and symptoms
> No information is available on non-covered parts of the network, as there are non-mobiles making calls over there!> Nevertheless, cells in border of non-covered zones do have a particular behavior:
> Cell A will mainly perform Better Cell handovers towards its neighbors, whereas cell B, bordering the non-coverage area, willperform emergency handovers for MSs exiting the network.
• For these MS, mainly DL Quality HO will be triggered: – DL because MS antenna is less efficient than BTS one,
– Quality rather than Level since Qual has a greater priority in Alcatel HO causes.
AB
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 11/331
© Alcatel 11
11@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Depending on the information sources you have:
• Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS) – – (RxLevel , RxQuality) matrix
– Radio Link Counter S vector
– Number of calls with DL/UL bad coverage (bad RxLev, badRxQual)
• Abis interface (for example with COMPASS)
– bad quality > 5%
– bad level RxLev < - 95 dBm and RxQual > 4
• OMC-R or A interface – unexpected high traffic, induced by call repetition
• Billing information
– High recall rate detected
1.2 Coverage problemExamination
> RMS: new PM type in B7• Provides statistics from any area in the network which are available at any time.
• Cost-effective.
• Easier and cheaper to perform than Drive test or Abis Trace.
• The operator can tune 54 parameters (based on RxLev, BFI, C/I, Radio Link Counter S, Path Balance, etc.) to define up to16 templates (depending on cell type – rural, urban, etc. – for example).
• Trigger from the OMC-R.
• NPA can save up to 15 days of RMS for the complete network.
• Templates can be designed in RNO.
• Result reports are available in RNO and NPA.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 12/331
© Alcatel 12
12@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> If the actual coverage is not the one predicted by RNP tools
– check antenna system – increase or decrease antenna down-tilt
– check BS_TXPWR_MAX
– to be increased if value different to RNP power budget
> If the actual coverage is OK compared to the predicted ones
– indoor traffic, to be handled by specific means
– if black spot close to cell border, ease outgoing HO
1.2 Coverage problemTypical causes
BS_TXPWR_MAX
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 13/331
© Alcatel 13
13@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Example of an Abis trace analysis
1.2 Coverage problemInvestigation with Abis trace (1/2)
Frequency RxLev_UL RxLev_DL RxQual_UL Path_loss_UL Path_loss_DL del ta_Path_loss Delta_qual ity AV_MS_PWR Nb_of_samplesRxQual_DL
Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_QualityQual3
Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_QualityQual3
119 -89.29 -84.67 0.42 123.82 123.67 0.15 -0.01 34.53 30740.43
92 -89.77 -89.09 0.41 124.87 128.09 -3.21 0.03 35.11 10 2530.38
111 -83.15 -79.15 0.17 116.05 121.22 -5.16 -0.16 32.9 53390.33
DISTRIBUTION OF UPLINK QUALITY
119 86.50% 3.19% 2.50% 1.92% 2.08% 0.98% 0.26% 3.32%2.57%
92 88.11% 1.82% 1.91% 2.14% 2.17% 1.15% 0.19% 3.51%2.51%
111 77.70% 4.30% 4.30% 3.56% 3.56% 1.70% 0.17%4.36%
119 88.29% 1.82% 2.05% 1.30% 1.46% 1.76% 0.94% 4.16%2.37%
92 87.50% 2.98% 2.60% 2.11% 1.14% 0.74% 0.50% 2.38%2.43%
111 71.30% 3.82% 4.02% 4.16% 4.30% 4.23% 3.16%4.89%
DISTRIBUTION OF DOWNLINK QUALITY
5.43%
11.73%
> It could have been coverage problems if this trace was made for 3 mono-TRX cells. In this case, the 3 lines are uncorrelated.Anyway, delta path loss of frequency 111 is greater than 5dB, showing a problem on this TRX.
> If this is a 3-TRX cell, it cannot be a coverage problem as the three TRXs are not impacted. It will be either interference ormalfunction of one TRE.
> If the trace is done on 3 mono-TRX cells, in that case, it could be a coverage problem. Be careful when interpreting this resulttable: even if average levels in the UL and the DL are high and a lot of Quality problems are seen, nobody can say that sampleswith bad quality have a good level ! The level seen is just an average…
> One should have a look to the next slide…
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 14/331
© Alcatel 14
14@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Example of an Abis trace analysis
1.2 Coverage problemInvestigation with Abis trace (2/2)
Thresholds
Bad Coverage
– RxLev ≤ -95
- RxQual > 4
Interference – RxLev > -95
– RxQual > 4
3-88.006
3-95.3331-71.003
1-80.0061-80.003 -80.003
5
711
11212
Number_UL: 10 253
Number_DL: 10 253
Int_UL: 2
BC_UL: 358
Int_DL: 0%
0.02%
3.49%
67-104.64
20
48-
107.50
51
Number_UL: 5339
Number_DL: 5339
Int_UL: 0
BC_UL: 290
Int_DL: 0%
BC_DL: 626
0.00%
5.43%
Samples<Lev>BSIC
63-101.54
2
Samples<Lev>BSICNeigh_Cell_Nb
Samples<Lev>BSICNeigh_Cell_Nb
<RxLev_Serving>= -102.17 dBm3.74%BC_DL:115
57-100.5320
45-98.71210
34-98.0365
33-98.6137
<RxLev_Serving>= -106.56 dBm
BC_DL: 244 2.38% <RxLev_Serving>= -106.17 dBm
Frequency: 92
Frequency: 111
11.73%Neigh_Cell_Nb10
> All samples are Bad Coverage samples (BC). None is interference, showing that this cell is not facing any interference problem.
> By the way, if the cell is mono-TRX, this is a coverage problem.
> If the cell is 3 TRXs, this is a malfunction of the TRE (shown also by the high value of delta_path_loss).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 15/331
© Alcatel 15
15@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Suspecting a cell coverage problem
• Distribution of samples per RxQual value and RxLev band
• Distribution of samples per RxLev band
1.2 Coverage problemInvestigation with RMS (1/2)
0
1
2
4
5
7
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
RxQuality (Nb)
RxLevel(dB)
[0, 14 793]
]14 793, 23 446]
]23 446, 29 586]
]29 586, 34 348]
]34 348, 38 239]
]38 239, 41 529]
]41 529, 44 378]
]44 378, 46 892]
Out of RangeX
Interval of numberof samples
Downlink Samples Matrix in log scale
3
6
Not acceptable coverage limit:too low level
too bad quality
> A coverage problem is observed when a significant amount of the traffic of a cell is suffering from both low level and bad quality(RxQual).
> To confirm, distribution of samples per RXLEV band should be also considered to know the proportion of calls which areexperiencing a low signal level.
> If a lot of samples of low level and bad quality are observed for only a sub-part of the TRXs (can be one only) then a BTS hardwareproblem or a problem on the antennae should be suspected.
> If all the TRXs are experiencing a lot of samples of low level and bad quality then a coverage problem must be suspected.
> These RMS indicators are provided on RNO tool per TRX, per Cell:
• Matrix of Number of Measurement Results per DL RxQual value and per DL RxLev bandRMQLDSAM = RMS_DL_RxQuality_RxLevel_sample
• Vector of Percentage of Samples per DL RxLev bandRMQLDLVDV = RMS_DL_RxLevel_distrib
• Vector of Percentage of Samples per DL RxQual bandRMQLDQUDV = RMS_DL_RxQuality_distrib
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 16/331
© Alcatel 16
16@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Suspecting a cell coverage problem
• Average TA values per RxQual value and RxLev band
1.2 Coverage problemInvestigation with RMS (2/2)
16.00%
14.00%12.00%
10.00%
8.00%
6.00%
4.00%
2.00%
0.00%
0 1 / 1 2 / 2 0 0 1
0 1 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 2 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 3 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 4 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 5 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 6 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 7 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 8 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
0 9 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
1 0 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
1 1 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
1 2 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
1 3 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
1 4 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
%N > TA thres TA max
Maximum Timing Advance and TA > threshold
N > TA thresTA max
TA threshold
0
1
2
4
5
7
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
RxQuality (Nb)
RxLevel(dB)
[0, 2]
]2, 4]
]4, 6]
]6, 8]
Out of Range
Interval of averageTiming Advance
Uplink average TA Distribution
3
6
X
Acceptablecoverage limit:
sufficient level andgood quality
Not acceptablecoverage limit:
too low level andtoo bad quality
% of TA valueover TA threshold
has also to beconsidered
> In order to know if the coverage problem is due to a big amount of traffic at the cell border or rather to indoor calls, the average TAvalue per RXQUAL value and RXLEV band as well as the Percentage of TA values over TA threshold should be observed.
• Matrix of Average TA per UL RxQual value and per UL RxLev bandRMQLUTAM = RMS_UL_RxQuality_RxLevel_TimingAdvance
• Rate of Measurements Results whose TA is greater than the TA thresholdRMTAGTR = RMS_TimingAdvance_greater_threshold_rate
• Maximum TA value of all values reported in Measurement ResultsRMTAMXN = RMS_TimingAdvance_max
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 17/331
© Alcatel 17
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.3 Interference problem
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 18/331
© Alcatel 18
18@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Definition: Interference
• A network facing interference problems presents good RxLev and bad
RxQual in the same time on some areas.
> Symptoms
• Customers complain about bad speech quality (noisy calls) and/or calldrops
• OMC QoS indicators
– SDCCH/TCH Drop
– Low proportion of better cell HO
– High rate of DL/UL quality HO and interference HO
– Low HO success rate
• A interface indicators
– High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interface failure
1.3 Interference problemDefinition and symptoms
> DL/UL depends on the way on which the interference is present.
> Mainly, interferences are in the DL, due to bad frequency planning introducing interferences in the network. And this problem willnot change till the frequency plan is not returned…
> Sometimes, interference can be in the UL in very dense area (for example, microcell area), since MSs are very close.
> Finally, sometimes interferences are not coming from BS or MS but from another radio equipment, either in the UL or the DL.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 19/331
© Alcatel 19
19@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS)
– RxQual/RxLev matrix – CFE/RxLev matrix
– C/I vectors for neighbors
– C/I vectors for MAFA frequencies
– MAFA is a new standardized GSM feature for mobiles
– MAFA mobiles can provide C/I measurements from
non-neighbor cells
– Number of calls with DL/UL interference (good RxLev, bad
RxQual)
– Number of noisy calls (bad RxQual) with bad voice quality (badFER)
– A high rate use of the most robust AMR codecs also denounce
interferences problems . But be careful, this can also be due to apessimistic choice of the thresholds used for codec change.
1.3 Interference problemExamination with RMS (1/3)
> The feature Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS) is designed to make far easier the work for planning and optimization of thenetwork by providing the operator with useful statistics on reported radio measurements.
> In fact these statistics give directly the real cell characteristics by taking into account the MS distribution.
> Thanks to this feature, the operator is able to:
• detect interfered frequencies.
• assess the quality of the cell coverage.
• detect and quantify cell unexpected propagation.
• assess the traffic distribution in the cell from statistics on reported neighboring cells.
• evaluate the voice quality in the cell.
• etc.
> In regards to the “RTCH Measurements Observation” (measurement type 11), the Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS) bring thefollowing advantages:
• smaller report files.
• the report files always have the same maximum length whatever the measurement duration is.
• every measurement is taken into account (no sampling).
• no more need for measurement post-processing tools for statistics. Directly available with RNO or NPA.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 20/331
© Alcatel 20
20@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Suspecting a cell interference problem
• Number of samples per RxQual value and RxLev band
1.3 Interference problemExamination with RMS (2/3)
Quality problems are obvious at anylevel of RMS data
Interference highlighted
Network fine tuning needed
0
1
2
4
5
7
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
RxQuality (Nb)
RxLevel(dB)
[0, 14 793]
]14 793, 23 446]
]23 446, 29 586]
]29 586, 34 348]
]34 348, 38 239]
]38 239, 41 529]
]41 529, 44 378]
]44 378, 46 892]
Out of RangeX
Interval of numberof samples
Downlink Samples Matrix in log scale
3
6
Average DL RxQuality = 2.81
Average RxQual value per RXLev bandhas also to be considered
0
1
2
3
4
56
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
RxQuality (Nb)
RxLevel(dB)
Downlink average RxQuality per RxLevel
RxQualityAverage
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 21/331
© Alcatel 21
21@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Suspecting a Voice Quality problem
• Number of samples per BFI band and RxLev band
1.3 Interference problemExamination with RMS (3/3)
[0, 1[
[1, 2[
[2, 4[
[6, 8[
[8, 10[
[14, 18[
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
CFE (Nb)
RxLevel(dB)
[0, 14 793]
]14 793, 23 446]
]23 446, 29 586]
]29 586, 34 348]
]34 348, 38 239]
]38 239, 41 529]
]41 529, 44 378]
]44 378, 46 892]
Out of RangeX
Interval of numberof samples
Consecutive Frame Erasure Matrix in log scale
[4, 6[
[10, 14[
[14, 18[
[14, 18[
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
[-110,-104[
[-104,-98[
[-98,-92[
[-92,-86[
[-86,-80[
[-80,-74[
[-74,-68[
[-68,-62[
[-62,-56[
[-56,-47[
Average CFE
RxLevel (dB)
Uplink average Consecutive Frame Erasure per RxLevel
7
8
Average RxQual
0
1
2
3
4
5
6CFEAverage
RxQualityAverage
Consecutive Frame Erasure (BFI) is a
measurement based on loss of consecutivespeech frames over one SACCH mw.
It is directly linked to Voice Quality.
RxQual to be compared with CFE since BadRxQual does not always mean bad VQ.
> These RMS indicators are provided on RNO tool per TRX, per Cell:• Matrix of Number of Measurements Results per CFE band (or BFI band) and per UL RxLev band
RMFEM = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_RxLevel_sample
• Vector of Average number of Consecutive Frame Erasure per UL RxLev bandRMFEBFAV = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_avg_per_RxLevel
• Vector of Average UL RxQual per RxLev bandRMQLUQUAV = RMS_UL_RxQuality_avg_per_RxLevel
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 22/331
© Alcatel 22
22@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> GSM interference
– co-channel – adjacent
> Non GSM interference
– other Mobile Networks
– other RF sources
1.3 Interference problemTypical causes
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 23/331
© Alcatel 23
23@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Adjacent channel interference
– +6 dB are sufficient to interfere (9 dB according GSM)
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: adjacent channel (1/2)
Level
Frequency
F(BTS1)
6 dB
F(BTS2)
F(BTS1) = F(BTS2)+1
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 24/331
© Alcatel 24
24@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Adjacent channel interference:
• Symptom
– Usually downlink interference
– High rate of quality HO, call drop (due to HO but mainly due toradio) and TCH assignment failure
• Examination
– Neighbor cells in Abis trace (only for BCCH)
– Non-neighbor cells in RMS (MAFA frequencies)
– Frequency planning C/(I adjacent) < -6 dB
• Correction
– Downtilt increase of interferer, or even change of antennaorientation
– Reduction of BS power if necessary, Change of frequency (bestsolution)
– Concentric cell implementation (1 extra TRX needed if trafficcannot be supported by Outer+Inner configuration)
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: adjacent channel (2/2)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 25/331
© Alcatel 25
25@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> GSM Interference
• Co-Channel interference – -12 dB are sufficient (-9 dB according GSM)
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: co-channel (1/2)
Level
Frequency
F(BTS1)
-12 dB
F(BTS2)
F(BTS1) = F(BTS2)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 26/331
© Alcatel 26
26@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Co-channel interference
• Symptom
– Usually downlink interference
– High rate of quality HO, call drop and call failure
• Examination
– Neighbor cells in Abis trace (only for BCCH)
– Non-neighbor cells in RMS (MAFA frequencies)
– Frequency planning C/I < 12 dB
• Correction
– Downtilt increase of interferer, or even change of antennaorientation
– Reduction of BS power, Change of frequency
– Concentric cell implementation (1 extra TRX needed if trafficcannot be supported by Outer+Inner configuration)
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: co-channel (2/2)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 27/331
© Alcatel 27
27@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> GSM interference: µcellular
• BTS1: ARFCN 5
• BTS2: ARFCN 6
• MS1 indoor
– RxLev_UL: - 90 dBm
• MS2 outdoor, connected to BTS2
– 1: no level on BTS1(BTS 1 under-roof)
– 2: - 80 dBm on BTS1:interferer UL/DL
– 3: no level on BTS1
– µcell algo prevents BTS2->BTS1 HO
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: µcellular
MS 1(indoor)
MS 2(outdoor) 1
2
3
BTS 1(Micro)
BTS2
> When interferences are created by frequency plannig, it’s not so hard to detect them. But frequency planning tools mainlyconsider DL C/I and coverage.
> Some problems are more difficult to predict. For example, let’s consider a microcell layer:
• A and B are 2 microcells with the coverage described before in dense urban environment.
• Even if both cells A & B are using adjacent frequencies (5 and 6), the overlapping area is far from cell A antenna. Thus, inthis area C/I is lower than 6 dB.
• A “red” MS is connected on cell A. When the MS starts its call, it transmits full power and a PC algorithm quickly reducesMS power as the received level is very good (microcell coverage). When MS A enters the building, it faces a loss of signalof 20 dB. Then, MS power increases to MS_TXPWR_MAX.
• A second mobile “B” is connected to cell B and moves down in the coverage area of cell B. MS power of B decreasesquickly down to MS_TXPWR_MIN as the MS is close to the antenna. But when MS B arrives outside the building where Ais sitting, A and B are close and transmitting on adjacent frequencies… Then B has to increase its power to avoid droppingits call. By the way, global level of freq B is increased in all cell B… creating interference in the UL.
A
B
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 28/331
© Alcatel 28
28@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> GSM Interference: Forced DirectedRetry
• The MS should connect tocell2, but no TCH available
• The MS connects to cell 1 withforced directed retry
• The MS is emitting at highlevel (far from BTS1)
– UL interference for BTS 3
• BTS 1 is emitting at high level
– DL interference at BTS 3
1.3 Interference problemGSM interference: Forced Directed Retry
C e l l 2 : 45
C e l l 3 : 2
3
C e
l l
1 :
2 4
MS
BTS2
BTS1
BTS3
> Another more difficult case of interference: FDR• When examining the preceding situation of planning tool: no problem of C/I. No risk of interference.
• The FDR algorithm allows an MS connected on an SDDCH on a cell without any free TCH to make an SDCCH-TCHhandover (cause 20) so that it takes a TCH on its neighbor. As seen from the user, this is not a handover (callestablishment phase, no impact on speech quality), and this algorithm is very efficient to avoid cell congestion cases.
• This algorithm is mainly based on neighbor level compared to parameter L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR (n). If the level greaterthan this threshold, the TCH is to be seized on neighbor.
• FDR is mandatory for dual layer or dual band networks (and very easy to configure in this case), since we have capturehandovers. Capture handovers send traffic to lower or preferred band cells. In case these cells are congested, calls maynot be established, even if upper or non-preferred band cells are free (due to MS idle mode selection, advantagingmicrocell for example). With the FDR algorithm, the MS takes an SDCCH in the preferred cell, and FDR is used to take aTCH on the non-preferred cell in case of congestion. This situation highlights a good network behavior, since the MS is atthe same time in the coverage area of both cells (preferred and not preferred).
> The situation described on the slide corresponds to the usage of FDR in a single layer network. This is in that case a heavy-to-tune algorithm presenting of lot of interference and bad quality call risks, since the mobile will be connected to a cell when beingnot in its service area.
umbrella
microcell
FDRcapture
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 29/331
© Alcatel 29
29@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Other mobile networks: TACS/AMPS/NMT900
– Inter-modulation with GSM BS/MS receiver
– spurious RACH for AMPS (AMPS Tx bands close to GSMuplink band)
– examination
– TASC: coverage hole with 600 m from TASC BTS
– AMPS => 50% reduction of range if AMPS/GSM BTScollocated
> Other RF interferers (Radar, shop anti-theft mechanisms, medicaldevice ...)
1.3 Interference problemNon-GSM interference
> Other RF interferers:• medical devices: GSM equipments disturb them more than the opposite !
• anti-theft mechanisms.
• Example:
• The Microcell is showing a very high call drop rate. On one frequency, very small call duration.
• No problem seen in the frequency plannig. No potential interferer.
• Abis trace:
• The Spectrum analyzer connected on the antenna feeder highlights a peak on GSM freq 6 in the UL…
• Anti-theft mechanism turned off: no more problem…
shop
Microcellantenna
Qual
Level
Qual
Level
DL UL
interference
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 30/331
© Alcatel 30
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problem
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 31/331
© Alcatel 31
31@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Definition: Unbalanced power budget
• A cell facing unbalanced power budget problems presents a too high
path-loss difference between UL and DL (often DL>UL)
• Rule: try to have delta as small as possible to avoid access networkpossible only in 1 direction (usually BTS->MS: OK and MS->BTS: NOK)
> Symptoms:
• OMC QoS indicators
– High rate of Uplink quality Handover causes
– Low incoming HO success rate (no HO Access triggered on the uplink)
– Degradation of TCH failures and OC call drop indicators
• A interface indicators
– High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interface failure
• O&M Alarms
– Voltage Standing Wave Ratio BTS Alarm (VSWR)
– TMA Alarm (in case of G2 BTS or Evolium BTS with high power TRE)
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problemDefinition and symptoms
> UL Quality HO is triggered:• UL since the problem is in the UL.
• Quality as Quality has greater priority than level.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 32/331
© Alcatel 32
32@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problemExamination
> Examination
• RMS – – Path Balance vector per TRX
– Number of calls with abnormal bad FER (good RxQual & badFER)
• Abis monitoring:
– |delta path-loss| > 5dB
– Check if problem is occurring for 1 TRX or all
> Problem on 1 TRX: FU/CU or TRE problem or ANY problem or cables connected to this equipment.> All TRXs: problem on antenna, feeder, jumper or common equipment (ex: ANX, ANC).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 33/331
© Alcatel 33
33@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Example of an Abis trace analysis
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problemAbis trace
106 -94.52 -87.19 0.43 127.55 130.19 -2.64 0.18 33.03 20660.25
Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_QualityQual3
Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_QualityQual3
89 -84.29 -75.17 0.65 115.32 118.17 -2.85 0.21 31.03 20010.44
118 -90.75 -83.36 0.46 123.22 126.36 -3.14 0.04 32.46 31930.41
124 -88.89 -85.30 0.29 120.48 128.30 -0.37 31.59 29310.67
DISTRIBUTION OF UPLINK QUALITY
106 84.75% 4.07% 3.68% 1.36% 1.50% 0.92% 0.53% 2.95%3.19%
89 81.41% 1.70% 2.95% 6.35% 2.55% 1.30% 0.10% 3.95%3.65%
118 83.62% 4.23% 4.23% 1.57% 1.79% 0.97% 0.25%3.35%
106 90.27% 3.44% 2.08% 0.92% 1.36% 0.34% 0.05% 1.74%1.55%
89 80.16% 6.45% 7.00% 1.50% 0.50% 0.45% 0.10% 1.05%3.85%
118 86.78% 2.72% 3.95% 1.41% 1.13% 1.19% 1.00%1.82%
DISTRIBUTION OF DOWNLINK QUALITY
3.01%
3.32%
Frequency RxLev_UL RxLev_DL RxQual_UL Path_loss_UL Path_loss_DL del ta_Path_loss Delta_qual ity AV_MS_PWR Nb_of_samplesRxQual_DL
-7.82
124 90.79% 1.06% 2.18% 1.77% 1.30% 0.48% 0.07%2.35% 1.84%
124 77.14% 4.37% 5.87% 3.48% 1.36% 0.82% 1.02%5.94% 3.21%
Example of Computation of delta path loss based on Abis measurements
BTS transmitted power 45,4 MS transmitted power 33
combiner loss -4,4
measured received DL level -93 measured received UL level -98
DL Path loss 134 UL path loss 131
delta path loss computed on Abis -3 dBm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 34/331
© Alcatel 34
34@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Suspecting a TRX hardware problem
• Average Path Balance
• Fair average Path Balance at Cell level can hide a bad value for one TRX
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problemRMS data
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
[-110,-20[
[-20,-10[
[-10,-6[
[-6,-3[
[-3,0[
[0,3[
[3,6[
[6,10[
[10,20[
[20,110[
Nb Samples
PathBalance(dB)
NbSamples
PathBalance Distribution
Average Cell Path Balance = - 0.9 dB
> These RMS indicators are provided on RNO tool per TRX, per Cell:• Vector of the Number of Measurement Results per Path Balance band
RMPBV = RMS_PathBalance_sample
• Average Path Balance valueRMPBAN = RMS_PathBalance_avg
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 35/331
© Alcatel 35
35@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Antennae or common RF components, TMA (pb common to allTRXs of the BTS)
> TRX RF cables/LNA ... if problem located on only 1 FU
1.4 Unbalanced power budget problemTypical causes
> Every BTS has its proper architecture and the diagnosis must be adapted.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 36/331
© Alcatel 36
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.5 TCH Congestion problem
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 37/331
© Alcatel 37
37@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.5 TCH Congestion problemDefinition and symptoms
> Definition: TCH Congestion
• TCH Congestion rate (TCH Assignment Phase) is too high (morethan 2%)
• Rule: try to meet the offered traffic (asked by users) by providingthe right number of resources (TRX extension)
> Symptoms:
• Customers complain about ‘Network busy’
• OMC QoS indicators
– High “TCH Congestion rate”
– Low “incoming Intra/Inter BSC HO success rate” (no TCH
available) – High “Directed Retry rate” if activated
• A interface indicator: “BSS Congestion failure in OC”
– High rate of Assignment Failure messages, No radioresource available
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 38/331
© Alcatel 38
38@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.5 TCH Congestion problemExamination and typical causes
> Examination: TCH Congestion
• On a per cell basis examination, check the evolution ofthe TCH Congestion rate.
> Typical causes:
• Special events:
– Foreseeable: football match, important meeting
– Activate some TRXs already installed(and use Synthesized FH)
– Add special moving BTSs
– Not foreseeable:car crash on the highway
> Cells on wheel operational by several operators around the world for special events coverage & capacity• IRMA (SFR) connected to Caen’s BSC.
• Orange coverage / Football WC 1998 for Paris « Stade de France »:
– Specific cells covering Paris Stadium. During games, only small capacity (using joker frequencies). During breaks,some TRX off cells around are turned off, and frequencies are reused for stadium cells.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 39/331
© Alcatel 39
39@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.5 TCH Congestion problemTypical causes (1/2)
• Daily periodic problems
– At peak hour, the cell is not correctly dimensioned.
Hardware solution
– Estimate the offered traffic:
At OMC-R level: Traffic in Erlang/(1- TCH Congestion rate)
– Use the B-Erlang law to estimate the number of TCHsrequired for a 2% blocking rate, thus the target configuration
– Add TRXs to reach the new target configuration and find ‘jokerfrequencies’ and / or implement concentric cells.
> Warning: “offered traffic” is not the capacity delivered by the system but the traffic asked by the users.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 40/331
© Alcatel 40
40@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.5 TCH Congestion problemTypical causes (2/2)
> Daily periodic problems
– At peak hour, the cell is not correctly dimensioned.
Software solution
– Use specific densification features
» Half Rate
» Forced Directed Retry
» Traffic handover
» Fast Traffic handover
» Candidate Cell Evaluation (FREEFACTOR /LOADFACTOR)
> Half rate may not only mean “SW” solution. Need of G2 BSC/TC, Evolium TRE or G2 DRFU.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 41/331
© Alcatel 41
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1 TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
1.6 Deducing the right team forintervention
Theoretical presentation
Coverage problem
Interference problem
Unbalanced power budget problem
TCH Congestion problem
Deducing the right team for intervention
Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 42/331
© Alcatel 42
42@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.6 Deducing the right team for interventionProcess
Problem characterization
Make assumption causes
Check the tuning of default radio parameters
Consult the config. db Choose an (other) classical algo
Identify the tunable parameters
Impact estimation
Standard setting ?
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Call expert
- Microcell, multiband- Concentric
=N
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Parameters modificationDatabase updating
Impact simulation of aparameter modification
No
- Hopping- Marketing
Yes
QOS alarm on the network,on a BSC or some cells
- Indicators (% call drop)- Field measurements/planning- Subscriber complains
QOS team
DHCPEND
Drive test team
DHCPEND
Dimensionning team
OK
Correctionaction
Maintenance team
Planning team
NOK
Cell corrected ?Neighbor cell ?
RFT team - Interferences- Coverage (indoor)- Power budget
- Congestion (TCH, SDCCH)- BSS problemInvestig problem ?
Planning/BSS causes
Standard parameters ?
On purpose
System problem ?
Simulation OK ?
Recurrent problem ?
N times
Check ? With QOS ?
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 43/331
© Alcatel 43
43@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.6 Deducing the right team for interventionCoverage problem
> Coverage problem:
• If the field reality does not match the RNP prediction – Maintenance team to change physical configuration (tilt,
azimuth, antenna height, etc.) and drive test team to checkit
• If the field reality matches the RNP prediction
– Deployment team to add sites (tri-sector, micro cellular,indoor cells)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 44/331
© Alcatel 44
44@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1.6 Deducing the right team for interventionOthers problems
> Interference problem:
• Planning team to identify the interference source and correct it(joker frequency, new frequency planning, etc.)
> Unbalanced power budget problem:
• Maintenance team to check the impacted BTS (Antennae, TMA,RF cables, LNA, diversity system, etc.)
> TCH Congestion problem:
• Traffic team (theoretically always in relation with the marketingteam) to manage the need of TRX extension, densificationpolicy, etc.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 45/331
© Alcatel 45
45@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
1. Typical radio problemsTraining exercise
Timeallowed:
10 minutes
High rate of UL QUAL HOcauses
Good RxLev and BadRxQual
VSWR alarm (OMC-R)(Voltage Standing Wave Ratio)
Bad RxLev and Bad RxQual
OMC QOS indicators:% TCH ASS failure high% call drop high
% QUAL HO% call drop% call failure
UnbalancedPower Budget
Bad coverage Interferences TCHCongestion
High Path-loss differencebetween UL and DL
Low incoming HO successrate
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 46/331
© Alcatel 46
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATEDPARAMETERS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 47/331
© Alcatel 47
47@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS & ASSOCIATED PARAMETERSSession presentation
> Objective: to be able to describe the Power control and Hand-overalgorithms and list the associated parameters
> Program:
2.1 Theoretical presentation
2.2 Radio measurements principles
2.3 Averaging windows and book-keeping
2.4 Radio Link Supervision and Power control
2.5 Handover Detection
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
2.7 Handover Management
2.8 Exercise
S1: TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
S2: ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS
S3: OMC-R RADIO PARAMETERS
S4: ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
S5: CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 48/331
© Alcatel 48
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.1 Theoretical presentation
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 49/331
© Alcatel 49
49@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
JUSTIFICATION
When the detected problem does not concern another team (Networkplanning and frequency planning, Dimensioning, Radio engineering,Maintenance) or
when the other teams cannot give any solution (too tight frequency planning,no additional TRX available, no financial budget for new sites, etc.)
the Radio Fine Tuning team has to find a compromise between:
– High traffic density (Erl/km²/Hz)
– High quality of service (Call drop, CSSR, Speech quality,indoor, etc.)
Its role: take charge of radio resources management process
> This process can be fully described by Power Control and Handoveralgorithms.
In-depth knowledge of these algorithms is required for tuning
2.1 Theoretical presentationJustification
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 50/331
© Alcatel 50
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.2 Radio measurements principles
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 51/331
© Alcatel 51
51@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.2 Radio measurements principlesRadio measurement mechanisms (1/2)
> MS connected (TCH or SDCCH)
> The serving cell gives the MS the list of the neighbor cells tolisten to
> Every SACCH, the MS reports to the serving cell: measurementreport message
• Received level of 6 best cells(which can change)
• DL level and qualityof serving cell
B e s t
cell B e
s t ce l l
B e s t c e l l B e s t c e l
l
C e l l
C e l l
B e st c e l l
Cel l
B e st c e l l
S e r v i n g c e l l
SYS_INFO_5message (list)
MS reporting
> The BTS sends a SYS_INFO_5 message that contains the list of neighbor cells for connected mode. (The SYS_INFO_2 messagecontains the list of neighbor cells for idle mode).
• Sys info 2bis, 2ter, 5bis and 5ter are also used for multiband networks.
• MS reporting depends on EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH and on MULTIBAND_REPORTING parameters.The MS may report:
– 6 strongest cells of any band (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=0), or
– 5 strongest cells of the serving band + 1 strongest cell of another band(MULTIBAND_REPORTING=1), or
– 4+2 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=2), or
– 3+3 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=3).
> RXLEV
• Range: [-110dBm, -47dBm]• Binary range: [0, 63]; 0=-110dBm, 63=-47dBm
• The higher the physical or binary value, the higher the receiving level
> RXQUAL
• Range: [0.14%, 18.10%]
• Binary range: [0, 7]; 0=0.14%, 7=18.10%
• The lower the physical or binary value, the lower the bit error rate, the better the quality
• 0-2=excellent; 3=good; 4=ok; 5=bad; 6=very bad; 7=not acceptable
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 52/331
© Alcatel 52
52@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> For each MS connected to the BTS (TCH or SDCCH)
• UL received level and qualityis measured every SACCH
• The Timing Advance (TA) is computed
• The UL information is gatheredinto the measurement report
• This is the message result sent by the BTS to theBSC
• The BSC is computing algorithms
• usually using average value (sliding window) of these measurements
2.2 Radio measurements principlesRadio measurement mechanisms (2/2)
BSC
MS
D L m e asur e m e n t s
U L
+ D L m
easu r e m e n t s
BTS
Measurementreport
Measurementresult
Candidate cellevaluationMeasurementsActive channelpreprocessing
Candidate cellevaluationHO & PCdecision
Candidate cellevaluation
PC execution
HO execution
> The BTS starts sending MEASUREMENT RESULT messages as soon as it receives the RL ESTABLISH INDICATION messagefrom the MS.
> The BTS stops sending MEASUREMENT RESULT messages upon receipt of one of the two following messages:
• DEACTIVATE SACCH• RF CHANNEL RELEASE
> Every SACCH multiframe, the BTS:
• receives the MEASUREMENT REPORT message from the MS. For power control and handover algorithms, this messagecontains downlink measurements and, in the layer 1 header, the power used by the MS.
• does uplink measurements.
• reports the uplink and downlink measurements to the BSC in the MEASUREMENT RESULT message.
• Input flows
– Uplink radio signal: radio signal received on the Air interface.
– BS_TXPWR_CONF: BS transmit power currently used by the BS.
– DTX_DL: indicator of downlink DTX use.
• Output flows
– Abis MEASUREMENT RESULT message
• Internal flows
– Radio measurements:
– Air MEASUREMENT REPORT message (DL) containing DL MS radio measurements.
– Uplink radio measurements (quality and level) and a flag indicating whether DTX was used in the downlink(DTX/DL).
– Timing advance: last TA calculated by the BTS.
– MS_TXPWR_CONF: last reported value of MS power (reported by the MS).
– BS_TXPWR_CONF: value of the BS transmit power currently in use.
– BFI_SACCH: bad frame indicator of the SACCH block produced every SACCH multiframe (# 480ms):
– 0 = SACCH frame successfully decoded
– 1 = SACCH frame not successfully decoded
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 53/331
© Alcatel 53
53@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.2 Radio measurements principlesStructure of a measurement result
CHAN_NUMBER_IEID
FREQ(5) / BSIC(5) / RXLEV_NCELL(6)
Meas_result_number_IEID
Meas_result_number
Element Identifier
Length
{2} / RXLEV_UL_SUB_
{2} / RXQUAL_UL_FULL / RXQUAL_UL_SUB
BS_POWER_IEID
{3} / BS_POWER
Element Identifier
MS_TXPWR_CONF / R{3}
TOA / R{2}
Element Identifier
Length
Length
BA_USED / DTX_UL / RXLEV_DL_FULL
0 / MEAS_VALID / RXLEV_DL_SUB
0 / RXQUAL_DL_FULL / RXQUAL_DL_SUB / NO_NCELL_M
NO_NCELL_M / RXLEV_NCELL(1)
FREQ(1) / BSIC(1)
BSIC(1) / RXLEV_NCELL(2)RXLEV_NCELL(2) / FREQ(2) / BSIC(2)
BSIC(2) / RXLEV_NCELL(3)
RXLEV_NCELL(3) / FREQ(3) / BSIC(3)
BSIC(3) / RXLEV_NCELL(4)
0 / Message Type{7}
RXLEV_NCELL(5) / FREQ(5)
RXLEV_NCELL(4) / FREQ(4)
SACCH_BFI / DTX_DL{1} / RXLEV_UL_FULL
CHANNEL_NUMBER
RXLEV_NCELL(6) / FREQ(6)
MSG_TYPE
MSG_DISK
TI {4} / Prot. Disc{4}
BSIC(4) / RXLEV_NCELL(5)
FREQ(6) / BSIC(6)
L1 Info
L3 Info:
Measurementreport from
the MS
> Basically, the MEASUREMENT RESULT message is composed of:
• L1 info: SACCH Layer 1 header containing MS_TXPWR_CONF and TOA.
• L3 info: MEASUREMENT REPORT from the MS. This message contains the downlink measurements and neighbor cell
measurements.• Uplink measurements performed by the BTS.
• BTS power level used.
> SUB frames correspond to the use of DTX
• if the mobile is in DTX, the rxlevsub or rxqualsub is used to avoid measuring the TS where there is nothing to transmit inorder not to distort measurements.
• else rxlevfull is used that is to say all TSs are measured.
> MS TXPOWER CONF: which is the actual power emitted by the MS.
> TOA is timing advance.
> SACCH BFI: bad frame indicator; 2 values 0 or 1; 0 means that the BTS succeeded in decoding the measurement report.
> How the neighbor cells are coded:
• BCCH1 index in BA list / BSIC1; BCCH2 index in BA list / BSIC2
• why? because it does not receive LAC/CI (too long ) but BCCH and replies with BCCH/BSIC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 54/331
© Alcatel 54
54@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Extended Measurement Reporting mechanisms
• Extended MeasurementOrder includes theMAFA frequencies theMS is asked to measure
• EMO sent once to theMS on SACCH afterTCH seizure
• Extended MeasurementResults include theaverage signal level
measured on eachMAFA frequency overone SACCH mf duration
• EMR received once percall on SACCH
2.2 Radio measurements principlesExtended Measurement Reporting (EMR)
Channel Activation Acknowledge
Assignment Request
Physical Context Request
Physical Context Confirm
Channel Activation (TCH) (EMO included)
TCH ESTABLISHMENT
TCH Assignment Complete
Assignment Complete Assignment Complete
SACCH
SACCH
SACCH
SACCH
SACCH (EMO)
(MAFA Freq. List)
SACCH (EMR)
(MAFA Freq. RxLev)
TCH ASSIGNMENT (OC or TC)
MS BTS BSC MSC
> When the BTS receives a CHANNEL ACTIVATION with the Extended Measurement Order (EMO) included, it must send thisinformation on the SACCH to the corresponding mobile only once.
> When the BTS has to send this information, it must replace the sending of system information 5, 5bis, 5ter or 6 by this information.
At the next SACCH multiframe, the BTS must resume the sending of this system information by the replaced one.> The EMO must be sent after 2 complete sets of SYS_INFO5 and 6, i.e. after the 2nd SYSINFO 6 after the reception of SABM. This
guarantees the MS has received a complete set.
> Then, the BTS normally receives from the MS an EXTENDED MEASUREMENT RESULT with the level of the frequencies tomonitor. The BTS must make the correlation between these levels and the frequencies contained in the latest EMO information,after having decoded them, according to the order of the ARFCN. The ‘EXTENDED_MEASUREMENT_RESULT’ is NOTforwarded to the BSC, instead a ‘MEASUREMENT_RESULT’ with indication ‘no_MS_results’ is sent to the BSC.
> In particular, the BTS must identify the level of the BCCH frequency of the serving cell (which must always be part of thefrequencies to monitor) and apply it as the RXLEV_DL in the Radio Measurement Statistics. The other frequencies will beconsidered in the same way as the BCCH frequency of neighbor cells: they will be linked to the neighbor level and C/I statistics.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 55/331
© Alcatel 55
55@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Time allowed:
5 minutes
• (BSIC, BCCH index)/(LAC, CI) problem
– As LAC and CI information take up toomuch space, the MS only reports thedecoded BSIC and the BCCH index whenit sends measurement on the adjacent cell
– The BSC makes the correspondencebetween the couple (BSIC, BCCH index)and the real neighbor cell concerned[completely defined by (LAC,CI)]
– WHAT IS THE RISK?
2.2 Radio measurements principlesTraining exercise (1/2)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 56/331
© Alcatel 56
56@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.2 Radio measurements principlesTraining exercise (2/2)
> Explain why cell 2 has a very high outgoing HO unsuccessful rate anda high call drop
Cell 2
Cell 1
Cell
( 7, 62 )
CI=1964GSM900
Cell 3
CI=6169GSM900
( 7, 62 )
( 3, 46 )
Cell
CI=6169
GSM900
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 57/331
© Alcatel 57
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.3 Radio measurements data processing
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 58/331
© Alcatel 58
58@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.3 Radio measurements data processingFunctional entities
BSC
Active ChannelPre-processing
BTS
Radio LinkMeasurements
Assignment of radio measurements data processing functions in the ALCATEL BSS
> The active channel pre-processing function calculates average values of signal levels, qualities and timing advance provided bythe radio link measurements function.
> The pre-processing is based on a sliding window averaging technique. The averaging is either weighted or unweighted dependingon the type of the input parameters.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 59/331
© Alcatel 59
59@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Active channel pre-processing
• ACTIVATED EACH TIME A MEASUREMENT IS RECEIVED
• AVERAGING VALUES OF SIGNAL LEVELS, QUALITIES,TIMING ADVANCE
– USING “SLIDING WINDOW” TECHNIQUE
• BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF NEIGHBOR CELLS – The MS is reporting the 6 best cells at one time
– They can change from 1 measurement to another
– Maximum for 1 call: last 32 best ones (among 64 maximumdeclared as neighbor)
2.3 Radio measurements data processingActive channel pre-processing
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 60/331
© Alcatel 60
60@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Active channel pre-processing – Principles
• HANDLED by the BSC• ACTIVATED when the BSC receives:
– ESTABLISH INDICATION from the MS on SAPI 0, or
– HANDOVER FAILURE from the MS, or
– ASSIGNMENT FAILURE from the MS (in case of intracellhandover)
• STOPPED when a HANDOVER COMMAND is emitted in theserving BSC
• AVERAGING VALUES OF SIGNAL LEVELS, QUALITIES,TIMING ADVANCE
– USING “SLIDING WINDOW” TECHNIQUE
• BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF NEIGHBOR CELLS
2.3 Radio measurements data processingActive channel pre-processing - Principles
> The pre-processing function is stopped when a HANDOVER COMMAND is emitted by the serving BSC. At this time, theMEASUREMENT RESULT messages are ignored by the pre-processing function and no update of the book-keeping tables oraveraging is done anymore.
> The pre-processing function is enabled again (in case of failure of an intracell or intercell handover) after reception of eithermessages listed above, and the old measurements are kept in the book-keeping list and taken into account in the new averaging.
> The pre-processing function is completely handled by the BSC. The input parameters of this function are provided by the BTSevery SACCH multiframe in the MEASUREMENT RESULT message.
> The function calculates average values of levels, qualities and timing advance. The pre-processing method is based on a slidingwindow averaging technique. The pre-processing is done for every measurement sample, i.e. every SACCH multiframe. Theaveraging intervals are expressed in terms of SACCH multiframe periods and their range is between 1 and 31.
> The averaging process for any variable can start as soon as A_YYYY_XX (YYYY stands for “LEV”, “QUAL”, “PBGT” or “RANGE”and XX for “HO”, “DR”, “PC” or “MCHO”) samples, each with MEAS_VALID bit set to 0 (validity indicator reported by the MS in theMEASUREMENT REPORT message), are actually available except in case of the averaging of the received level from theneighbor cells and the averaging of AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO, AV_BS_TXPWR_HO and AV_BS_TXPWR_DR.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 61/331
© Alcatel 61
61@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Avoid reacting too early to some “atypical” measurement(s)
2.3 Radio measurements data processingMeasurement averaging (1/2)
75.00
80.00
85.00
90.00
95.00
100.00
105.00-------
> The calculation of levels, qualities and timing advance (i.e. distance information) uses a variety of averaging window sizes as wellas specific weighting factors for quality estimates.
> One separate window exists for:
• power control on the uplink and the downlink (A_LEV_PC , A_QUAL_PC),
• emergency handover (A_LEV_HO , A_QUAL_HO , A_RANGE_HO),
• fast emergency handover for microcells (A_LEV_MCHO),
• better cell handover and better zone handover (A_PBGT_HO) for intra-layer, interlayer and interzone handovers,
• forced directed retry (A_PBGT_DR),
• neighbor filtering and ranking for all HOs (A_PBGT_HO),
• codec adaptation (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR , A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 62/331
© Alcatel 62
62@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Objective: average measurements to avoid reacting to transientdegradation
• Principle: sliding window: level/quality/distance values are averaged forN last samples
N = A_LEV_HO samples for uplink and downlinklevelN = A_QUAL_HO samples for uplink and downlink qualityN = A_RANGE_HO samples for distanceN = A_PGBT_HO for level used in power budget equation
• Example (A_LEV_HO=6, A_QUAL_HO=4, A_PBGT_HO=8)
• Experiences• some experiments have shown that the number of HOs is verysensitive to modification of these values
2.3 Radio measurements data processingMeasurement averaging (2/2)
DL LevelAV-RxLev
AV-Lev-PGBTDL Qual
AV-RxQual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24Meas
2 3 3 43
74
-95
75
-99-90 -92 -93 -98 -100 -98 -90 -80-97 -96 -94
-95 -947 5 26 7 5
-75 -72 -71 -110 -70-90 -86 -81 -83 -80
-92 -89 -86 -87 -831 1 0 6 04 2 1 2 2
-69-78-8002
-68 -78 -88 -95-77 -78 -81 -78-77 -77 -78 -810 0 1 22 0 0 1
-98-83-8532
-100 -110 -110-88 -95 -100-83 -88 -936 7 73 5 6
-110-104-9977
> At BSC level,
• Input flows
– MEASUREMENT RESULT
• Control flows
– active channel pre-processing configuration parameters for PC:
– A_LEV_PC, W_LEV_PC, A_QUAL_PC and W_QUAL_PC,
– active channel pre-processing configuration parameters for HO:
– A_LEV_HO, W_LEV_HO, A_PBGT_HO, W_PBGT_HO, A_QUAL_HO, W_QUAL_HO, A_RANGE_HO,A_LEV_MCHO, W_LEV_MCHO, A_PBGT_DR.
– cells list for book-keeping:
– BA_IND_SACCH: indicator of the change of the BA_allocation,
– NBR_ADJ: number of declared adjacent cells of the serving cell denoted by n,
– for n=1 to NBR_ADJ: BSIC(n) and FREQ(n).
• Output flows
– Averaged measurements for power control:
– AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ; AV_RXLEV_UL_PC: MS power control/threshold comparison,
– AV_RXQUAL_DL_PC ; AV_RXLEV_DL_PC: BS power control/threshold comparison.
– Averaged measurements for handover detection:
– AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO, AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO, AV_RXLEV_UL_MCHO,
– AV_RXLEV_UL_HO, AV_RXLEV_DL_HO, AV_RXLEV_DL_MCHO,
– AV_LOAD , averaged traffic load
– AV_BS_TXPWR_HO, AV_RANGE_HO,
– AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO, AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n), AV_RXLEV_NCELL_BIS(n).
– AV_RXLEV_PBGT_DR,
– AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n), n=1..BTSnum.
– BFI_SACCH
– AV_RXQUAL_xx_CA_HR_FR, AV_RXQUAL_xx_CA_FR_HR
– MS_TXPOWER_CONF / BS_POWER: last power level reported by the MS and transmit power currently used bythe BS.
A_LEV_HO
_ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 63/331
© Alcatel 63
63@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF NEIGHBOR CELLS
– The MS reports the measurements of the NO_NCELL_M(≤ 6) best cells every multi-frame
– The adjacent cells reported by the MS can change from onemeasurement to another
– The book-keeping function keeps a table of the last 32reported adjacent cells
– Clearing process of non-reported neighbors during 10s(signal level=0)
2.3 Radio measurements data processingneighbor cell measurement book-keeping
> An MS is required to measure the BCCH power level of a number of BCCH frequencies. These measurements are used for thepower budget computation in the BSC and the candidate cell evaluation in the BSC.
> The MS reports to the BTS, in the MEASUREMENT REPORT message, the measurements of the NO_NCELL_M(NO_NCELL_M <= 6) best cells it receives (RXLEV_NCELL, BCCH frequency index and BSIC number) for each multiframe. Incase of multiband capability, the mobile reports the best cells of each supported frequency band (if available). This reporting isallowed at BSS level by the flag EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH and it is specified by the parameter MULTIBAND_REPORTING.
> The adjacent cells reported by an MS can change over the averaging interval. The book-keeping function keeps a tablecomposed of the last 32 reported adjacent cells, the maximum number of which is NBR_ADJ. The total number of adjacent cellsfor which measurements reported by the MSs are available within the average interval is BTSnum.
> The BSC G1 maintains a table of up to 150 cells, from which up to 64 can be declared as adjacent cells to a given cell.
> The BSC G2 maintains a list of up to 1000 cells, from which up to 64 can be declared as adjacent cells to a given cell.
> Because the maximum number of adjacent cells may be greater than 32, the number of adjacent BCCH frequencies is limited to32. Moreover, a mechanism for overwriting obsolete entries in the bookkeeping table, when new cells are reported, is provided.
> When the variable BTSnum reaches its maximum value of 32 and at least one new cell has to be entered in the list, then the BSCsorts out all cells in the bookkeeping list, which have been reported with signal level = 0 for the last 20 measurements (10seconds).
> This is done by summing the raw measurement values over the last 20 samples. All the corresponding cell entries are clearedfrom the bookkeeping list, BTSnum is decreased by the number of cleared entries and some of the vacant entries are used toinclude the new cells.
The end of the comment is on the next page...
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 64/331
© Alcatel 64
64@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.3 Radio measurements data processingTraining exercise
> Measurements averaging
• With ‘averaging window’excel sheet...
• Compute averaging on quality,distance and level
• Make charts with different slidingaveraging windows
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Raw measurements
Average measurements
AV_RXLEV_DL_HO
A_LEV_HO=8
A_LEV_HO=2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 151-75
-80
-85
-90
-95
Number ofmeasurements
Level
AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO
3
A_QUAL_HO=8
A_QUAL_HO=2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 1 51
4
3
2
1
0
Quality
AV_RANGE_HO
10
12
15
A_RANGE_HO=8
A_RANGE_HO=2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 2 1 3 14 1 51
25
20
15
10
5
Distance
DL Level
A_LEV_HO=8
A_LEV_HO=4
A_LEV_HO=2
DL Level
A_QUAL_HO=8
A_QUAL_HO=4
A_QUAL_HO=2
DL Level
A_RANGE_HO=8
A_RANGE_HO=4
A_RANGE_HO=2
-80
2
10
-78
2
11
-84
3
9
-87
3
11
-80
2
13
-75
1
12
-77
4
14
-94
4
15
-79
3
16
-77
1
17
-78
2
18
-84
3
17
-89
3
19
-90
3
20
-91
4
19
DL Level
DL Quality
Distance
-80
-76
-82
-82
-86
-82
-81
-87
-82
-82
-78
-81
-82
-78
-81
-80
-81
-82
-82
-87
-84
-85
-90
-85
-89
-91-81
-82
-86
-82
-84
-82
-78-79
A_LEV_HO=4
Number ofmeasurements
Number ofmeasurements
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
4
3
3
4
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
2
2
3
32 3
A_QUAL_HO=4 3
13
14
16
13
16
17
15
17
18
15
17
18
16
18
18
17
19
20
18
19
20
11
12
11
13
13
13
14
11 10
A_RANGE_HO=4 10
> Fill up the table with average function. The chart will be automatically processed
> The fact that there may not be enough cleared entries to store new measurements is excluded, see justification below:
> Because the MS must resynchronize at most every 10s with the neighbor cells it monitors, it is useless to keep cells in thebookkeeping list which have not been reported for more than 10s, it will be impossible to makkes an handover towards thesecells.
> Therefore, the overwriting mechanism described above will function correctly if there are less than 32 cells reported in every 10s,which makes an average rate of 3 new cells per second.
> The potentiality of overflow of the book-keeping list is therefore excluded.
> The book-keeping is performed according to the BSIC and BCCH frequency couple. This function updates the table everymultiframe except if the measurement report is missing or Measurement Valid Bit is set to not valid. When the level of a cell is notreported, a zero must be entered as measurement value. For each multiframe and for each of the NO_NCELL_M cellmeasurements it receives, the function has to check the BSIC number and the BCCH frequency index (FREQ(n)).
> When the couple (BSIC, BCCH frequency) is not in the reference list (received from the OMC), the corresponding measurementsshould be discarded.
> The BTSnum variable is updated every multiframe except if the measurement report from the MS is missing. It is incremented bythe number of new couples (BSIC number, BCCH frequency index) registered as described above.
> Remark: Two cells can have the same BSIC number or the same BCCH frequency index. Therefore, the couple of theseparameters is needed to define a cell.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 65/331
© Alcatel 65
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.4 Radio Link Supervision and Power Control
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 66/331
© Alcatel 66
66@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlFunctional entities
BSCBTS
Radio LinkSupervision
PC CommandPC ThresholdComparison
Radio LinkCommand
Radio LinkMeasurements
Active ChannelPre-processing
Assignment of PC functions in the ALCATEL BSS
> The two main functions specified in this document and implemented in the ALCATEL BSS are:
• Radio link supervision and radio link command:
– These functions handle the detection of the radio link failure so that calls which fail either from loss of radio
coverage or unacceptable interference are satisfactorily handled by the network. The radio link supervision isresponsible for detection of the loss of the radio link, based on incorrectly received SACCH frames. The radio linkcommand is responsible for commanding to set the power at a maximum level for radio link recovery or to clear thecall when the radio link has failed.
– The radio link recovery can be activated or not, depending on a configuration flag (EN_RL_RECOV). The radio linkfailure procedure is always running and clears the call when the radio link has failed.
• Power control:
– This function handles the adaptive control of the RF transmit power from the MS and the BS. The RF power controlaims at minimizing the co-channel interference and also at reducing the DC power consumption of the MS. Thisfunction is in charge of detecting a need for a power command and then of applying this power command.Therefore it can be divided into two processes: PC threshold comparison and PC command. MS and BS powercontrol are operating independently, they can be activated or not, depending on configuration flags (EN_MS_PCand EN_BS_PC).
> All these functions require directly or indirectly input parameters provided by the function in charge of the radio linkmeasurements.
> Most of the input data required by the power control functions are provided by Active channel pre-processing function.
> The figure depicts in a general way:
• the interconnections between all these functions,
• the implementation of these functions in the ALCATEL BSS.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 67/331
© Alcatel 67
67@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Principles
• Detection (by BTS) of a radio link failure with an MS
– notification to BSC for radio resource release
• Try to recover an MS when radio becomes poor
– optional mechanism “radio link recovery”
– by requiring BTS and MS to transmit at maximum power
• Equivalent mechanism in MS for Radio Link Failure detection
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlRadio link supervision
> The determination of the radio link failure is based on a counter. According to the GSM Technical Specification 05.08 for the BSS,the criterion for incrementing/decrementing this counter should be based:
• either on the error rate on the uplink SACCH,
• or on RXLEV/RXQUAL measurements of the MS.> In the ALCATEL BSS, it is based on the number of SACCH frames which cannot be decoded.
> It must be stressed that this criterion is related to the first one recommended above but it is not exactly the same. The ALCATELcriterion is in fact the one recommended by the GSM Technical Specification 05.08 for the MS.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 68/331
© Alcatel 68
68@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPrinciples of radio uplink supervision
> For each active radio channel, a counter “S” is• decremented by 1 each time an SACCH frame cannot be decoded
(BFI=1)• incremented by 2 each time a valid SACCH frame is received
> The value of S gives a measure of the “quality” of uplink radio link> Initial value of S = BS_RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT
• if S reaches N_BSTXPWR_M, a radio link recovery is triggered optional)• if S reaches 0, a radio link failure is detected
> RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS ≥ RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT is important because themobile must release the radio channel first.
M S
BTS
C o u n te r S C o u n te r S '
R L T O _ B S( B S _ R A D I O _ L I N K _ T I M E O U T )
1 81 6
R L T O ( T 1 0 0)( R A D I O _ L I N K _ T I M E O U T )
N _ B ST X P W R _ M
1 3R a d i o l in k R e c o v e r y
S A C C H b l o c kl o s t : - 1
S A C C H b l o c kr e c e i v e d : + 2
0 0R a d i o li n k
F a i l u r e
> The radio link supervision function is performed in the BTS and it uses three parameters given to the BTS in the TRXconfiguration data message:
• EN_RL_RECOV: flag enabling/disabling the sending of CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION by the BTS when the need
for radio link recovery is detected,• N_BSTXPWR_M: threshold for the radio link recovery,
• RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS: threshold (number of SACCH messages) for the radio link failure.
> In addition, the function handles a counter named S. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS is the initial and maximum value of S.
• For each SACCH not decoded, S is decremented by 1 while for each SACCH decoded, it is incremented by 2. Theincrementation or decrementation is performed if the following condition is met: RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS >= counter S>= 0.
• As soon as the counter S is equal to the threshold N_BSTXPWR_M, the radio link recovery is triggered if EN_RL_RECOV= ENABLE. Therefore, in the case where the shadowing is so strong that all SACCH frames are lost, the radio linkrecovery will be triggered after (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M) SACCH periods.
> The parameter N_BSTXPWR_M must be set according this simple behavior.
> If the radio link recovery is not successful, as soon as S reaches 0, the radio link failure procedure is applied.> As soon as a radio link failure is detected, the radio link supervision must be started again in the BTS.
INK_TIMEOUTBS_ RADIO_ _ _ ,
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 69/331
© Alcatel 69
69@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlS counter for radio link supervision
SACCHnumber
S value
2928272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321
0
5
10
15
20
25
RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_BS
N_BSTXPWR_M
SBFI
S = f [ BFI (t) ]
> Received events
• Activate supervision: activation of the radio link supervision from the BTS telecom layer 3,
• SACCH, BFI = 1: not decoded SACCH frame,
• SACCH, BFI = 0: decoded SACCH frame,
– Note: the BFI flag is internal to the BTS and does not deal with the BFI flag defined by the GSM.
• Deactivate supervision: deactivation of the radio link supervision by the BTS telecom layer 3.
> Transmitted events
• Radio link recovery: indication sent to the radio link command function in order to set the BS and MS powers to themaximum.
• Radio link failure: indication sent to the radio link command function in order to release the call.
> These events are sent to the BSC in the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message:
• In case of Radio link recovery, the BTS sends only once (to avoid overload of the Abis interface) the CONNECTIONFAILURE INDICATION message to the BSC with cause "set MS/BS-TXPWR-M” (value: '001 1111', reserved for Nationaluse). This action (message formatting) is performed by the GSM layer 3.
• In case of Radio link failure, the BTS sends the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message with cause 'Radio linkFailure' to the BSC.
> Thus, the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message on Abis is not showing any call drop. One should look at the cause ofCONFAIL.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 70/331
© Alcatel 70
70@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> The BTS is sending a Connection Failure Indication message
– cause ‘001 1111’ reserved for national usage (ALCATEL:RLR)
– On K1205: “set MS/ BS_TXPWR_MAX (Alcatel only)”
> The BSC is sending BS and MS POWER CONTROL messages
– required for maximum possible values
– The MS required level is embedded in the SACCH headerin the downlink
> Optional mechanism – EN_RL_RECOV =ENABLE
– useless without power control
– “master” vs. power control
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlRadio link recovery
> The action consists in increasing the power of the MS and of the BTS to their maximum, in a single step, if the link is failing, i.e.the BTS is not able to decode the SACCH anymore for some period of time.
> This functionality is performed upon reception of the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message (cause “set MS/BS-
TXPWR-M”) from the BTS. This message can be sent by the BTS only if EN_RL_RECOV = ENABLE. Upon reception of thismessage, the radio link command function:
1. sends to the BTS a power increase command up to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER if the MS is on the innerzone of a concentric or multiband cell) in the BS POWER CONTROL message.
2. sends to the MS a power increase command up to min(MS_TXPWR_MAX,P) (min (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER,P) if the MSis in the inner zone of a concentric or multiband cell) in the message MS POWER CONTROL.
> When a radio link recovery occurs, the radio link command function gives an indication to the power control function once thepower increase has been commanded.
> The maximum power increase of the MS is 2dB per 60 ms. Thus, if MS_TXPWR_MAX=33dBm and MS_TXPWR_MIN=13dBm,the MS coming from MIN to Max will take 600 ms.
Note: the BS Power Control process does not interfere with the recovery procedure since the former comes to a halt when noSACCH multiframe is received. Thus, the BS power control process does not take into account the radio link recovery event.
BS_TXPWR_MAX
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 71/331
© Alcatel 71
71@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Radio link failure
• The BTS is sending a Connection Failure Indication message
– Cause ‘radio link failure’
• The BSC is notifying the loss to the MSC
– Usually Clear Request “radio interface failure”
• The BSC is releasing locally the radio resource (TCH or SDCCH)
– Radio frequency Channel Release message sent to BTS
• The call is dropped !
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlRadio link failure
> The task of the radio link command consists in informing the call control function to release the call.
> Concentric cell or multiband cell
> The power value BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER is applied in case of radio link recovery for an MS in the inner zone. The power value
BS_TXPWR_MAX is applied in case of radio link recovery for an MS on an outer zone channel.
> Note: the radio link supervision procedure will function also if SACCH frames are not lost continuously, but with a longer reactiontime.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 72/331
© Alcatel 72
72@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlRadio link supervision: training exercise
> With the “RLS” excel sheet...
• Taking into account themeasurements with BFI andthe parameter values (N_BSTXPWR_Mand RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)
• Indicate when
– A radio link recovery is triggered
– A radio link failure is triggered
Time allowed:
5 minutes
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
11
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
18
5
17
18
18
18
18
17
16
15
14
12
11
13
12
12
11
10
9
8
76
5
7
6
10
6
8
17
18
4
11
7
3
13 Radio Link Recovery
BFI S Action
Radio Link Supervision
N_NSTXPWR_MAXRLTO_BS
1318
Parameters:
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 73/331
© Alcatel 73
73@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Aims of Power control
• Reduce emitted power to theminimumpossible
• Minimum power levels:
– GSM: 11dBm, 9dBm, 7dBmand 5dBm
– DCS: 2dBm, 0dBm
• Ensuring quality and receivedlevel of peer entity
• Adapted in real-time
• For Uplink PC: decrease ULinterference and save MS battery
• For Downlink PC, decrease DLinterference
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower control
Output Power (dBm)GSM-900
Output Power (dBm)DCS-1800
Powerlevel
14
15
16
17
18
19
15
13
11
9
7
5
2
0
-
-
-
-
BTS MS
U p l i n k
R X LE V _U L
M S _T X P W R D o w n l i n k
B S _T X P W R
R X LE V _D L
> The main objective of the power control, in connection with handover algorithms, is to allow a maximum number of MSs tooperate in the network while maintaining a minimum interference level.
> The algorithms must ensure that any mobile is connected with the cell in which the output powers from the MS and the BS are as
low as possible (to reduce MS power consumption and interference in the network) while keeping a satisfactory link quality.> When on a sufficient duration, the propagation conditions keep worsening, then action must be taken.
> The first action is to increase the output power levels at the MS or the BS. When the maximum allowed value has been reached, ahandover may become necessary.
> To reflect this philosophy in macrocells (not in microcellular environment), the algorithm allows for handover on quality andstrength reasons only when the last step of power control has been reached. If propagation conditions worsen rapidly when theMS is at low power, the power control algorithm allows to reach quickly the maximum power.
> Nevertheless great care must be taken in choosing the relative values of the thresholds for power control and handover as well asthe averaging window sizes (smaller window size and higher threshold for power control than for handover). It must beremembered that, although it is desired that the MS transmits with the lowest possible power, it is more important not to lose acall. Thus early triggering for the power control is possible, by choosing, small values for the averaging window sizes and highercomparison thresholds.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 74/331
© Alcatel 74
74@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Based on a threshold comparison mechanism
> Decrease emitted power when received level AND quality measured bypeer entity are better than a given value
> Increase emitted power when the received level OR quality is lowerthan a given value
> Does not decrease power if the resulting level is below the low levelthreshold
FEATURE REAL FAST PC GIVES REACTIVITY TO THEALGORITHMS
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control principles
> The threshold comparison process detects the need to change the MS power level. This detection is done by comparisonbetween the averaged values produced by the active channel pre-processing function and thresholds.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 75/331
© Alcatel 75
75@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> MS Power control (for BS PC, replace MS by BS and UL by DL)
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control detection
U_RXQUAL_UL_P
L_RXQUAL_UL_P
1
2
-95 -93 -85
L_RXLEV_UL_P
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
U_RXLEV_UL_P
Quality
Level
-90 -75-94
3
> A need for a PC command is detected when one of the conditions above is true. Then, the information for the execution of the PCcommand is given to the ‘PC command’ process.
> The MS power control function can be disabled with a flag EN_MS_PC. This flag is changeable from the OMC-R.
Note: The GSM coding of quality is contra-intuitive, since the value 0 codes for the best quality and 7 for the worst. Thus, thecomparison between two quality values must be understood in the opposite way in terms of quality.
Note: POW_RED_STEP_SIZE is used in two ways: for PC_COMMAND (decrease of MS power) and forPC_THRESHOD_COMPARISON (to avoid ping-pong effect).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 76/331
© Alcatel 76
76@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Power increase: If
• AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC > L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
• AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ≤ L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FHand AV_RXLEV_UL_PC < L_RXLEV_UL_P
Then PC_COMMAND(MS, INC, MS_P_INC dB, <min(MS_TXPWR_MAX, P))
> Power decrease: If
• AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC < U_RXQUAL_UL_Pand AV_RXLEV_UL_PC >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
• AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ≤ L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
and AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ≥ U_RXQUAL_UL_Pand AV_RXLEV_UL_PC > U_RXLEV_UL_P
Then PC_COMMAND(MS, RED, MS_P_RED dB, >MS_TXPWR_MIN)
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlMS PC Threshold comparison
> OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH is an internal variable that is equal to 0 in case of Non-Hopping cell and OFFSET_HOPPING_PC in caseof BBH or RH.
_ _ _
L_RXQUAL_UL_P _ _ _
_ _ ,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
L_RXQUAL_UL_P
_ _ _ _ _ _
S_TXPWR_MIN
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 77/331
© Alcatel 77
77@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Power command philosophy:
• Target received level TARGET_RXLEV_UL
– middle threshold between U_RXLEV_UL_P andL_RXLEV_UL_P
• Adaptive power step size
– According to the average received level
– Limited power step size to MAX_POW_INC andMAX_POW_RED
– If only Quality problem: fixed power step size
– POW_INC_STEP_SIZE and POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
– Two weighting factors to modify the algorithm reactivity whenlevel problem
– POW_INC_FACTOR for power increase
– POW_RED_FACTOR for power decrease
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlMS Power Control Command
> Whenever any of the threshold conditions occurs, a PC command must be sent to the MS over the air interface.
> In order to compute the adaptive power step size, the middle threshold between the upper threshold U_RXLEV_UL_P and thelower threshold L_RXLEV_UL_P is considered.
> This threshold is regarded as the target received level around which the MS should always stay. The following algorithm tries tomaintain and bring the MS power closer to this target threshold. The size of the power step is limited to MAX_POW_INC for anincrease of the MS power and MAX_POW_RED for a decrease of the MS power.
> When the received level is between the two thresholds U_RXLEV_UL_P and L_RXLEV_UL_P (i.e. no need to change the level)and a power control on quality cause is triggered, fixed power step sizes are applied: POW_INC_STEP_SIZE for power increaseand POW_RED_STEP_SIZE for power decrease.
> Two weighting factors POW_INC_FACTOR (for power increase) and POW_RED_FACTOR (for power decrease) allow to modifythe reactivity of the algorithm (the more POW_INC_FACTOR is nearby 1, the greater the reactivity of the algorithm is and thelarger the power step size is).
> The target received level is TARGET_RXLEV_UL for the uplink path.
> TARGET_RXLEV_UL corresponds to the next higher multiple of 1 dB from (U_RXLEV_UL_P + L_RXLEV_UL_P)/2.
_ _ _ _ _ _
MAX_POW_INCAX_POW_RED
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
POW_INC_FACTOR
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 78/331
© Alcatel 78
78@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlFast and Normal PC comparison
> Example
4800 960 1440 1920 2400
-110
-100
-90
-80
20 dB
Time(ms)
Power level(dB)
6 dB (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)
4 SACCH =1 Measurement Report (MR)
MR 2 MR 3 MR 4
Need for PC Command detected
PC Command
Normal Power Control
Fast Power Control
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 79/331
© Alcatel 79
79@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> PC_COMMAND (MS, INC, MS_P_INC dB, < power max)
• If MS_TXPWR < power max
then increase MS_TXPWR by min(MS_P_INC, MAX_POW_INC, powermax-MS_TXPWR)
• Where MS_P_INC is evaluated by the following algorithm:
if (AV_RXLEV_UL_PC < L_RXLEV_UL_P) (problem of level)
if (AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ≤ L_RXQUAL_UL_P +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH) (sufficient quality)
then MS_P_INC = roundup[ POW_INC_FACTOR*(TARGET_RXLEV_UL -AV_RXLEV_UL_PC)]
else MS_P_INC = roundup[ MAX ( POW_INC_FACTOR *(TARGET_RXLEV_UL - AV_RXLEV_UL_PC ),POW_INC_STEP_SIZE )]
else (problem of quality)
MS_P_INC = POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlMS Power Increase Command computation
> In the equations:
• MS_TXPWR is the last MS_TXPWR_CONF value reported by the BTS.
• ‘roundup’ means ‘round to its next higher multiple of 2 dB’.
• ‘rounddown’ means ‘round to its next lower multiple of 2 dB’.
> The rate of change of MS power is required to be one nominal 2 dB step every 60 msec. Thus a 30 dB step change should beaccomplished in 900 msec. The operator should be warned of this as it may impact on the choice of settings forMS_P_CON_ACK and MS_P_CON_INT.
> Then the ordered value of the MS transmit power, called MS_TXPWR, is sent to the MS as follows:
• The BSC sends the MS POWER CONTROL message to the BTS (i.e. to the TRX handling the relevant channel) whichthen forwards the PC command to the MS in the Layer 1 header.
• The MS applies the PC command and confirms this action by transmitting the applied power value (MS_TXPWR_CONF)on the uplink SACCH in the layer 1 header.
> On SACCH channel, the MS may not send the MEASUREMENT REPORT message (e.g. in case of transmission of ShortMessage).
• In this case, the BSC receives a MEASUREMENT RESULT message which does not contain the MEASUREMENTREPORT. The BSC takes into account the MS_TXPWR_CONF variable.
MAX_POW_INC
L_RXLEV_UL_P
L_RXQUAL_UL_P
POW_INC_FACTOR
POW_INC_FACTOR
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 80/331
© Alcatel 80
80@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> PC_COMMAND (MS, RED, MS_P_RED dB, > power min)
• If MS_TXPWR > power min
then decrease MS_TXPWR by min(MS_P_RED, MAX_POW_RED,MS_TXPWR- power min)
• Where MS_P_RED is evaluated by the following algorithm:
if (AV_RXLEV_UL_PC > U_RXLEV_UL_P) (good level)
if (AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ≥ U_RXQUAL_UL_P) (sufficient quality )
then MS_P_RED = roundup[ MAX(POW_RED_FACTOR*(AV_RXLEV_UL_PC- TARGET_RXLEV_UL)), 2dB]
else MS_P_RED = roundup[ MAX ( POW_RED_FACTOR *
(AV_RXLEV_UL_PC- TARGET_RXLEV_UL),POW_RED_STEP_SIZE )]
else (good quality)
MS_P_RED = POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlMS Power Decrease Command computation
_ _
_ _ _
U_RXQUAL_UL_P
_ _
POW_RED_FACTOR
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 81/331
© Alcatel 81
81@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
• This variable allows to take into account the frequency hopping inthe RxQual evaluation
• Defined on a per cell basis
• Algorithm:
If Frequency hopping applied
– then OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = Offset_hopping_PC
– Else OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlFrequency Hopping cases
> In order to take into account the frequency hopping in the RXQUAL evaluation, the variable OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH is introduced.
> If on the corresponding channel, Frequency hopping is applied then OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = Offset_Hopping_PC otherwiseOFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0
> Offset_Hopping_PC is a parameter defined on a per cell basis.
> PC Downlink in Frequency hopping case
• In this case, the BSC inhibits the BS power control on all the channels which use the BCCH carrier. The entity performingthe BS power control in the BSC gets all the information concerning a new channel and decides whether to activate theBS power control for this channel. The power control must be inhibited when the frequency used by the new channel is thesame as the frequency used for the BCCH in the BTS (cell) in which the channel is activated.
• For any channel which has the BCCH frequency in its hopping sequence (MA), the MS is measuring a very good downlinklevel each time it hops on the BCCH. To avoid that this results in a too optimistic average, it is possible to require from theMS not to include the BCCH measurement in the averages. This is achieved by setting the PWRC flag to 1 in theSYSTEM INFORMATION type 6 message sent by the BSS on the SACCH.
• If the channel is hopping only on the BCCH frequency (after a transmitter failure), it is considered as a non-hoppingchannel and it is concerned by the non-frequency hopping case.
Offset_hopping_PC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 82/331
© Alcatel 82
82@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Timers
• T_SDCCH_PC allows the inhibition of PC on SDCCH
• When a new power is required, the confirmation is awaited:
– MS_P_CON_ACK
– BS_P_CON_ACK
• As soon as the new power is acknowledged, a fixed duration is
awaited to trigger a new change of power, if necessary: – MS_P_CON_INT
– BS_P_CON_INT
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control timers (1/2)
> The timer T_SDCCH_PC allows to inhibit the MS and BS power control on SDCCH.
• This timer is changeable at the OMC-R level on a per cell basis. It is triggered upon receipt of the ESTABLISHINDICATION message after SDCCH activation for immediate assignment procedure. As long as the timer runs, the power
control is inhibited on SDCCH.• If the timer expires, the power control will be enabled again on SDCCH.
• If the timer is running at the sending of the RF CHANNEL RELEASE message, the timer is stopped.
> T_SDCCH_PC is useful in case of long SDCCH phases.
> During SDCCH for call establishment, PC disabled should be preferred with a view to secure call setup. Nevertheless, if SMSusage is very high, SDCCH phases may be long. In this case, to avoid interference, PC will be enabled after T_SDCCH_PCexpiry (about 5s).
> After any PC command is sent to the MS, some time must be expected before MS_TXPWR_CONF (power confirmation sent bythe MS on the uplink SACCH) can reach the desired value. The timer MS_P_CON_ACK is triggered after any power modificationcommand to monitor that the desired transmission power MS_TXPWR is reached.
• If MS_P_CON_ACK elapses before the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received, the power control decisionprocess is resumed immediately with the last MS_TXPWR_CONF received.
• If the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received before the timer MS_P_CON_ACK is elapsed, the timerMS_P_CON_ACK is stopped and the timer MS_P_CON_INT is triggered. Then the MS PC threshold comparison processis resumed with MS_TXPWR_CONF for the same MS as soon as MS_P_CON_INT expires.
T_SDCCH_PC
MS_P_CON_ACK
_ _ _
_ _ _
_ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 83/331
© Alcatel 83
83@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> IF xx_P_CON_ACK is expiring, it is a system problem:
• Wrong setting of xx_P_CON_ACK (too short)• No reception of power command by the MS
– a radio link recovery can be activated
• Problem on Abis
– repetition of BS power command
> The expiry of P_CON_INT is a normal mechanism
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control timers (2/2)
xx_ _ _
xx_P_CON_ACK
P_CON_INT
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 84/331
© Alcatel 84
84@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> LEVEL and QUALITY USED in EQUATION are average ones with
window size A_QUAL_PC and A_LEV_PC> BS POWER CONTROL INHIBITED ON BCCH frequency
– BCCH must be emitted at the maximum level
> MS dynamic constraint
– minimum 2dB every 60 ms
> Emitted power can be changed by radio link supervision algorithm
– Radio link supervision has a greater priority
> Activation of power control can slow down HO decision
– some causes can be triggered only if the MS (BTS) isemitting at the maximum power
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlExtra information
> Interaction with radio link command
• The MS power control function is informed of a radio link recovery by the radio link command function. Once the indicationis received, the PC command process is resumed immediately:
– timer MS_P_CON_ACK is started (or reset and started if running), – If MS_P_CON_ACK elapses before the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received, the power control
decision process is resumed immediately with MS_TXPWR_CONF = min(MS_TXPWR_MAX,P).
> According to GSM Technical Specification 05.08 section 7.1, the BCCH carrier must be broadcast with a constant power in thecell. In this release of the ALCATEL BSS, this constant value is set to the maximum power allowed in the cell that is defined bythe parameter BS_TXPWR_MAX.
• This means that all dedicated channels (TCH, SDCCH) which are on the BCCH frequency must always be transmittedwith the maximum power, i.e. the BCCH power must not be changed by the BS power control function.
A_QUAL_PC A_LEV_PC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 85/331
© Alcatel 85
85@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control: Training exercise (1/2)
> Power control UL
(Remark: Use the default parameters document)• What happens if we do not use Frequency
Hopping?
• Why is it better to have A_LEV_PC=A_LEV_HO /2?
• Thresholds:
– Lower QUAL of RX uplink = 3
– High QUAL of RX uplink = 2
– Lower LEV of RX uplink = -90dBm
– Upper LEV of RX uplink = -75dBm – POW_RED_STEP_SIZE= 4
– POW_INC_STEP_SIZE= 6
• Put the right threshold in the next slide chart
Time allowed:
25 minutes
A_LEV_PC A_LEV_HO
ower o up n
High QUAL of RX uplink
ower o up n
pper o up nPOW_RED_STEP_SIZE
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 86/331
© Alcatel 86
86@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.4 Radio link supervision and power controlPower Control: Training exercise (2/2)
> Power control UL
QUESTION
For each case:• PC triggered?• Step size value?
With POW_INC_FACTOR = 0,6and POW_RED_FACTOR = 0,6and MAX_POW_INC = MAX_POW_RED =8
Quality
Level
Nb of caseAV RXQUAL UL PC
AV RXLEV UL PC
Power control
Delta value
1 2 3 4 5 60 1 2 6 3 4
-98 -80 -73 -69 -86 -91
_ _POW_RED_FACTOR
_ _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 87/331
© Alcatel 87
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.5 Handover Detection
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 88/331
© Alcatel 88
88@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover main objective
> Send connected MS to another cell
• When needed: “rescue/emergency” handover
• If useful: “better cell” handover
> Toward the “best” cell
• From a radio point of view
– Power budget
– Level
• From a traffic point of view
– Less loaded target
• From a dynamic point of view
– MS speed
– “History” of the call
• From an operator point of view
> Emergency intercell handovers:
• These handovers are triggered when the call conditions deteriorate significantly in order to rescue the call. The causesare: "too low quality" , "too low level", " too long MS-BS distance", “too short MS-BS distance”, "consecutive bad SACCH
frames", "level dropping under high threshold".
> Better cell HO:
• These handovers are triggered to improve the overall system traffic capacity. This spans: interference reduction, signalingload reduction, traffic unbalance smoothing. The basic assumption for these handovers is that they should respect the cellplanning decided by the operator.
• The causes are: "power budget" , "high level in neighbor lower layer cell for slow mobile", "high level in neighbor cell in thepreferred band" and “traffic handover”.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 89/331
© Alcatel 89
89@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> The BSC is analyzing averaged measurement results
– active channel pre-processing (measurements averagingand book-keeping)
> To detect need/utility to handover
– Handover detection process
> To choose/rank target cells according to several criteria
– Candidate cell evaluation process
> To perform the handover
– Handover management process
2.5 Handover DetectionPrinciples
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 90/331
© Alcatel 90
90@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionFunctional entities
BSCBTS
Radio LinkMeasurements
HO Detection
Active ChannelPre-processing
HO Preparation
HO CandidateCell Evaluation
HO Management
HO Protocol
MSC
Assignment of HO functions in the ALCATEL BSS
> The HO Preparation function can also be named "handover algorithms" as the algorithms described are the "heart" of thisfunction.
• The ALCATEL handover preparation is derived from the basic algorithm found in Annex A of the GSM Technical
Specification 05.08.• The handover preparation is in charge of detecting a need for handover and proposing a list of target cells. Therefore it
can be divided into two processes: handover detection and handover candidate cell evaluation.
> The handover detection process analyzes the radio measurements reported by the BTS and triggers the candidate cell evaluationprocess each time a handover cause (emergency or better cell type) is fulfilled.
> The handover candidate cell evaluation works out a list of possible candidate cells for the handover. This list is sorted accordingto the evaluation of each cell as well as the layer they belong to (in a hierarchical network) and the frequency band they use (in amultiband network).
> Once the handover preparation is completed, the handover decision and execution (handover management entity) is performedunder the MSC or BSC control. The directed retry preparation is performed by the handover preparation function.
• Once the directed retry preparation is completed, the directed retry is performed either under the BSC control (internaldirected retry) or under the MSC control (external directed retry).
> An example of implementation of these functions except for directed retry is given in the GSM Technical Specification 05.08.
> The handover preparation requires indirectly input parameters provided by the function in charge of the radio link measurements.
> Most of the input data required by the handover functions are provided by a function called: Active channel pre-processing.
> The figure above depicts in a general way:
• the interconnections between these functions,
• the implementation of these functions in the ALCATEL BSS.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 91/331
© Alcatel 91
91@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Based on the contents of the measurement results
> The BSC is computing the need or utility to trigger a handover
> HO causes 25, split into 2 main categories:
• Emergency handover
– quality, level, distance, etc.
• Better cell handover
– power budget, traffic, etc.
> Some are specific to hierarchical and concentric architectures
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover causes detection
> The process is achieved in the BSC.
> Each time a set of pre-processed (averaged) measurements is available, this process checks whether a handover is needed. Ifthe need for a handover is detected, the target cell evaluation process is triggered.
> In case of a handover alarm, the handover detection process gives to the cell evaluation process:
• the preferred target cell layer: lower, upper or none.
• the raw candidate cell list, which can be either all neighbors, or the subset which verify the handover causes (plus otherspecific cells in particular cases). With each cell is given one of the handover causes which have been verified.
• The cause of handover.
> Four main handover categories are provided, depending on the cause of handover and the context of application. The context ofapplication for a handover is either "intercell" (the handover is performed between two different cells) or "intracell" (the handover isperformed in the same cell).
> The detection of a need for handover is performed through handover causes which are going to be detailed.
> The cause of handover is based either on a situation of emergency (this cause is therefore called "emergency cause") or on theexistence of better conditions. In this last case, the name of the cause depends on the context of application: for intercell
handovers, it is called "Better cell cause". For intracell handovers, it is called "Better zone cause", as it is applied only in the caseof interzone handovers in concentric or multiband cells.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 92/331
© Alcatel 92
92@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover causes
> HO causes for standard networks
Emergency HO
Cause 2
Cause 3
Cause 4
Cause 5
Cause 6
Cause 10
Cause 11
Cause 15
Cause 16
Cause 26
Too low quality on the uplink
Too low level on the uplink
Too low quality on the downlink
Too low level on the downlink
Too long distance between the
MS and the BTS
Too low level on the uplink in
the inner zone
Too low level on the downlink in
the inner zone
High interference on the uplink(intracell HO)
Aigh interference on the downlink
(intracell HO)
AMR channel adaptation HO
(HR to FR)
Better conditions HO
Cause 12
Cause 13
Cause 20
Cause 23
Cause 24
Cause 27
Cause 28
Cause 29
Power budget evaluation
Outer zonelevel Uplink &
Downlink
Forced directed retry
Traffic
(Modified in B8)
General capture
(Modified in B8)
AMR channel adaptation
HO (FR to HR)Fast traffic HO
TFO HO
30 Move from PS to CS zone
H
> HO causes for Extended Cells:
• Emergency causes
– cause 22: too short MS-BTS distance
> HO causes for hierarchical or multiband network:
• Emergency causes
– cause 7: consecutive bad SACCH frames received in a microcell
– cause 17: too low level on the uplink in a microcell compared to a high threshold
– cause 18: too low level on the downlink in a microcell compared to a high threshold
• Better causes
– cause 14: high level in neighbor lower layer cell for slow mobile
– cause 21: high level in neighbor cell in the preferred band
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 93/331
© Alcatel 93
93@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 2: too low quality on the Uplink
AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO > L_RXQUAL_UL_H +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO <= RXLEV_UL_IH
and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX)
and EN_RXQUAL_UL= ENABLE
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 2: UL Quality
Quality
Level
> Quality and Level causes (2, 3, 4, 5, 15, 16)
> The aim of these causes is to keep the call going when the radio link is degrading otherwise the radio link failure might bedetected and the call released. These causes wait generally for the power control process to increase the BTS and MS power to
their maximum values, except for the causes specific to microcellular environment.> Handover on "too low level" is used to avoid situations where the interference level is low, while the attenuation is quite high.
These conditions may appear for example in big city streets which enable a line of sight propagation from the BTS antenna. Thereis in this case a risk of abrupt quality degradation, if the MS moves away from the line of sight street.
> In case of simultaneous low-level and low-quality signals, an intercell handover is requested.
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
_ _
S_TXPWR_MAX
_ _
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 94/331
© Alcatel 94
94@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 3: too low level on the uplink
AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO <= L_RXQUAL_UL_H +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO < L_RXLEV_UL_H
and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX)
and EN_RXLEV_UL= ENABLE
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 3: UL Level
Quality
Level
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
_ _ _
S_TXPWR_MAX
_ _
A_QUAL_HO
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 95/331
© Alcatel 95
95@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 4: too low quality on the downlink
AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO > L_RXQUAL_DL_H +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO <= RXLEV_DL_IH
and BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX
and EN_RXQUAL_DL= ENABLE
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 4: DL Quality
Quality
Level
L_RXQUAL_DL_H
_ _
BS_TXPWR_MAX
_ _
A_QUAL_HO
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 96/331
© Alcatel 96
96@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 5: DL Level
> CAUSE 5: too low level on the downlink
• AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO <= L_RXQUAL_DL_H +
OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
• AV_RXLEV_DL_HO < L_RXLEV_DL_H
• BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX
• and EN_RXLEV_DL= ENABLE
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
Quality
Level
_ _ _
_ _ _
BS_TXPWR_MAX
EN_RXLEV_DL
_ _
A_LEV_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 97/331
© Alcatel 97
97@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 6: Too long distance between the MS and the BTS
AV_RANGE_HO > U_TIME_ADVANCE
and EN_DIST_HO= ENABLE
• Size of window for distance averaging: A_RANGE_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 6: Distance
Too long distanceBTS
> This cause is used when a dominant cell provides a lot of scattered coverages inside other cells, due to propagation conditions ofthe operational network. The consequence of these spurious coverages is the probable production of a high level of co-channelinterference.
> This cause is different from the others as it is more preventive. It does not make use of the propagation conditions of a call. It justdoes not allow an MS to talk to a BTS if it is too far away.
> It may happen for example that some peculiar propagation conditions exist at one point in time that provide exceptional qualityand level although the serving BTS is far and another is closer and should be the one the mobile should be connected to if theconditions were normal.
> It may then happen that these exceptional conditions suddenly drop and the link is lost, which would not have happened if themobile had been connected to the closest cell. So for these reasons, this cause does not wait for the power control to react.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 98/331
© Alcatel 98
98@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Emergency handovers specific to concentric cells
• Intracell handovers from inner to outer zone• cause 10: too low level on the uplink in inner zone
• cause 11: too low level on the downlink in inner zone
> May be triggered
– From inner zone of a concentric cell
– Towards outer zone, same cell
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells
C o n c e
ntr i c c e l l
I n n e r z o n e
O u t er z o n e
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 99/331
© Alcatel 99
99@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 10: too low level on the uplink in the inner zone
AV_RXLEV_UL_HO < RXLEV_UL_ZONE
and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)
• Averaging window: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 10
RXLEV_UL_ZONE
MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 100/331
© Alcatel 100
100@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 11: too low level on the downlink in the inner zone
AV_RXLEV_DL_HO < RXLEV_DL_ZONE
and BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
• Averaging window: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 11
_ _
= BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 101/331
© Alcatel 101
101@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 13: too high level on UL and DL in the outer zone
• Better condition intracell handover• If the cell is a multi-band cell, cause 13 is checked only for multi-
band MSs
> May be triggered
– From outer zone of a concentric cell
– Towards inner zone, same cell
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13 (1/6)
C o n c e
ntr i c c e l l
I n
n e r z o n
e
O u t er z o n e
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 102/331
© Alcatel 102
102@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 13: too high level on UL and DL in the outer zone
AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_ZONE ++ ZONE_HO_HYST_UL +
+ (MS_TXPWR - MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) +
+ PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref)
and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_ZONE ++ ZONE_HO_HYST_DL ++ (BS_TXPWR - BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) ++ PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref)
and AV_RXLEV_NCELL_BIS(n) <= neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
and EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE (B7)and EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO = ENABLE
• Averaging windows: A_LEV_HO and A_PBGT_HO (for n)
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13 (2/6)
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _
neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
_ _ _
A_LEV_HO A_PBGT_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 103/331
© Alcatel 103
103@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
• UL static hysteresis for interzone HO from outer to inner
– In case of multi-band cell, should take into account thedifference of propagation between GSM and DCS
• Added to cause 10 threshold RXLEV_UL_ZONE
> ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
• DL static hysteresis for interzone HO from outer to inner
– In case of multi-band cell, should take into account thedifference of propagation between GSM and DCS and the
difference of BTS transmission power in the two bands
• Added to cause 11 threshold RXLEV_DL_ZONE
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13(3/6)
E_HO_HYST_UL
RXLEV_UL_ZONE
ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 104/331
© Alcatel 104
104@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref)
• Penalty PING_PONG_HCP put on cause 13 if – The immediately preceding zone in which the call has been is
the inner zone of the serving cell
– And The last handover was not external intracell
– And T_HCP is still running
• PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref) = 0
– If the call was not previouslyin serving’s inner zone
– Or T_HCP has expired
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13(4/6)
C o n c e
ntr i c c e l l
I n n e r z o n
e
O u t er z o n e
_ _
_HCP
T_HCP
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 105/331
© Alcatel 105
105@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
• Concentric cells are designed tocreate an INNER zone
– protected from external interferers
– and creating no interferences on other cells
– … to be able to face more aggressive frequency reuse inINNER zone TRXs
• neighbour_RXLEV(0,n) tuning enables to avoid handovers if theMS position will lead to interferences
• the condition is checked towards all neighbor cells belonging tothe same layer and band than the serving cell
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13(5/6)
C o ncentr ic c e l lO uter zone
?
Inner zone
interferer 1
Inner zone
interferer 2I n ner zo n e
neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 106/331
© Alcatel 106
106@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> EN_CAUSE_13
• Load balance between inner and outer zones may be allowed bysetting EN_LOAD_BALANCE = ENABLE
• If EN_LOAD_BALANCE = ENABLE
– If INNER zone is less loaded than OUTER,EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE
– If INNER zone is more loaded than OUTER,EN_CAUSE_13 = DISABLE
• If EN_LOAD_BALANCE = DISABLE
– EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover algorithms for concentric cells: cause 13(6/6)
EN_LOAD_BALANCE
_ _
EN_LOAD_BALANCE
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 107/331
© Alcatel 107
107@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Outgoing intercell handovers from concentric cells
• As explained here before, the MS located in aconcentric cell can make intercell, emergency orbetter condition HO regardless their current zone
– For example, an MS locatedin the INNER zone of aconcentric cell can makedirectly a HO cause 12towards another cell,WITHOUT having to
trigger any cause 10 or 11to the OUTER zone before.
2.5 Handover DetectionOutgoing intercell handovers from concentric Cell
C o ncentr ic c e l l
O uter zone
I n ner zo n e
C o ncentr ic c e l lO uter zone
I n ner zo n e
C o ncentr ic c e l lO uter zone
I n ner zo n e
> The only restrictions are linked to EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO and EN_BI-BAND_MS parameters.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 108/331
© Alcatel 108
108@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Incoming intercell handovers towards a concentric cell
• In case an MS is making an incoming handover towards aconcentric cell (due to outer PBGT measurements,etc.), a TCH may
be allocated
– either in the INNER or in the OUTER zone, as for call setup
– depending on radio conditions
• In case of a multi-band cell, if the MS is not multi-band, it will alwaysbe sent to the OUTER zone
2.5 Handover DetectionIncoming intercell handovers towards Concentric Cell (1/2)
C o ncentr ic c e l lO uter zone
I n ner zo n e
Cell
?
?
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 109/331
© Alcatel 109
109@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Use part of Handover cause 13 algorithm on each potential target
> IF Cell(n) is external – The MS is directed to the OUTER zone of (n)
> ELSE (cell(n) is internal)
• IF
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEV_DL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST_DL+
+ (BS_TXPWR - BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)
and EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO = ENABLE
– The MS is directed towards the INNER zone
• ELSE
– The MS is directed towards the OUTER zone
2.5 Handover DetectionIncoming intercell handovers towards Concentric Cell (2/2)
RXLEV_DL_ZONE ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
_ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 110/331
© Alcatel 110
110@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• Decision based mainly on comparison of serving and neighborcells for:
– downlink level of serving and neighbor cells
– maximum emitting level of MS
• Aiming at decreasing UL & DL emitted power
• Should be the “normal” handover type
– no matter of emergency
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (1/11)
> In this case, there is another cell with a better power budget i.e., the link quality can be improved or maintained with a reducedtransmit power of both the MS and the BTS. The radio link is not degraded but there is the opportunity to decrease the overallinterference level by changing the serving cell of the given MS.
> In conjunction with power control, it presents the advantage to keep the interference as low as possible, since it minimizes thepath loss between the BTS and the MS.
> This cause is especially designed to cope with the requirement that the mobile should be connected with the cell with which thelowest possible output powers are used. To assess which of the cells is this "best cell", the algorithm performs everymeasurement reporting period the comparison of the path loss in the current and in the neighbor cell. This is a feature special toGSM which is made possible because the mobile measures the adjacent cell signal levels and reports the six best ones.
> This power budget gives the difference in path loss between the current cell and the adjacent cells reported by the mobile.
> When PBGT(n) is greater than 0, then the path loss from cell n is less than the path loss from the serving cell and thus theradiated power in the downlink direction, and therefore in the uplink direction as well, will be lower in cell n than in the current cell.
> However it would not be advisable to hand over the MS to another cell as soon as PBGT is greater than 0, because the MS wouldprobably oscillate between the two adjacent cells as the propagation conditions vary. An hysteresis mechanism is implemented toavoid this undesirable effect.
> No PBGT between different layers.
> Ok between different bands if EN_INTERBAND_PBGT_HO = 1
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 111/331
© Alcatel 111
111@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 12: Power budget equation
PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
- (BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) – MS_TXPWR_MAX)
- PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (2/11)
> The MS may be handed over from the serving cell indexed 0 to a neighbor cell indexed n only if the power budget exceeds thehandover Margin(0,n). The handover Margin(0,n) can be modified according to the traffic situation in the serving cell and theneighbor cell n. In this way, power budget handover can be delayed towards a loaded cell and traffic load handover can betriggered from a loaded cell. Once the MS is handed over, the same algorithm is applied in the new cell, and a new PBGT iscomputed (which will be close to the opposite value of PBGT in the old cell) and compared to a new HOMargin. (Thus, the globalhysteresis (from cell 0 to cell n and back to cell 0) is the sum of the two HOMargins).
> However, It is still possible that a ping-pong mechanism is created by different handover causes, for instance a handover may betriggered towards a neighbor cell for bad quality, but in the neighbor cell, a handover back may be triggered for power budgetreasons. In order to avoid this, an additional anti-ping-pong mechanism is implemented in the power budget calculation. It enablesto penalize for a certain time the cell on which the call has been before.
> In case of handover from SDCCH to SDCCH, this cause does not take the traffic situation into account.
> In multiband cell environment, the mobile can operate in a different band than the frequency band of the BCCHs. This can lead tocircular ping-pong handovers from the inner zone if the new band is DCS 1800 or to the impossibility to trigger PBGT handoversfrom the inner zone if the preferred band is GSM 900.
> To avoid this problem, when the MS is in the inner zone of a multiband cell, it may be handed over from the serving cell indexed 0to a neighbor multiband cell indexed n only if the power budget exceeds the handover Margin(0,n) plus the offset handovermargin which allows to handicap or favor the PBGT (In the inner zone, the cause “power budget” is only checked betweenmultiband cells, in a way to maintain the MS in the preferred band).
> The offset handover margin can possibly be used in concentric cells.
_ _
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) S_TXPWR_MAX
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 112/331
© Alcatel 112
112@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL
– received level of BCCH of neighbor cell
• AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
– received level of serving cell (BCCH or not)
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
– the highest is the best neighbor cell – but serving might not be at the maximum level (with DL
power control)
– necessity to have a corrective factor
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (3/11)
PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
- (BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) – MS_TXPWR_MAX)
- PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)
> ∆∆∆∆ BCCH = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - (AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO + C)
• with C = BS_TXPWR_MAX - AV_BS_TXPWR_HO.
> This corresponds to the difference of received BCCH signal levels.
• A correction factor C is taken into account for the serving cell, because the received signal level (i.e.AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO) may not be measured on BCCH.
BS_TXPWR_MAX
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) _ _ )
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 113/331
© Alcatel 113
113@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (4/11)
PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
- (BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) – MS_TXPWR_MAX)
- PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO
– BS_TXPWR_MAX are attenuations, not absolute level
– = (“bts_max_power”+BS_TXPWR_MAX) -(“bts_max_power”+AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
– AV_BS_TXPWR_HO: average of BS_POWER overA_PBGT_HO measurements
– corrective factor used to compensate for the fact that theserving cell may not emit at the maximum level
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL-[AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO+(BS_TXPWR_MAX-AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)]
– compare received level of neighbor and serving cells as if theserving one was emitting at the maximum level
BS_TXPWR_MAX
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) _ _
S_TXPWR_MAX
S_TXPWR_MAX
_ _
_PBGT_HO
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 114/331
© Alcatel 114
114@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (5/11)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
– maximum emitting power for the MS in neighbor cell n
• MS_TXPWR_MAX
– maximum emitting power for the MS in the serving cell
> MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX
• Corrective factor to compensate for the difference of maximum
power of each cell
• MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX = bts_max_power(n)- bts_max_power
– which should be the case if delta_path_loss is equilibrated
– if not exact, can be corrected with HO_MARGIN(0,n)
PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
- (BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) – MS_TXPWR_MAX)
- PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)
> Then, another correction factor must be taken into account because the maximum BS powers of the serving and neighbor cellsmay be different:
∆∆∆∆ TXPWR= MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX.
> As the first step of calculation is based on the downlink parameters, this correction factor should be based on the maximum BSpowers used in the serving and neighbor cells.
> Two reasons (which are not completely de-correlated) for not using the BS powers can be envisaged:
• for a given cell, the GSM does not specify formally the maximum BS power of the neighbor cells. Only BS_TXPWR_MAXis defined (it is sent on the air interface),
• it is not easy for the evaluating BSC to know the maximum BS powers of the neighbor cells.
> The use of the maximum MS powers requires that the difference of MS powers is equal to the difference of BS powers. Thiscondition is met in most cases. If it is not the case, the difference can be corrected by the operator with the HO_MARGIN(0,n)parameter (HO hysteresis).
> PBGT >0: the neighbor cell is more advantageous as the path loss is lower than in the current cell.
> PBGT <0: the serving cell is more advantageous than the current cell.
BS_TXPWR_MAX
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) _ _ )
_ _ n
_ _
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX
_ _ n - _ _
_ ,n
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 115/331
© Alcatel 115
115@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• Hysteresis to avoid ping-pong HO
• Static hysteresis defined for each couple of cells:HO_MARGIN (0,n)
– can also be used to correct delta_path_loss
• “Dynamic” penalty for call coming from cell n:
ping_pong_margin(n,call_ref) – penalty applied during a limited duration: T_HCP
– not used if call arrived with a forced directed retry
– penalty defined on a cell basis
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (6/11)
PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
- (BS_TXPWR_MAX – AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) – MS_TXPWR_MAX)
- PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)
> The main drawback of this handover category is the risk of "ping-pong " effect, which is an oscillating back and forth handoverbetween two (or three) cells. As the "better cell" handovers are meant to find the "best cell", the variation of the radio conditionswill trigger a big amount of better cell handovers, if the algorithms have a too sensitive reaction. Hence, some mechanisms areforecast, in order to prevent these oscillations from occurring repeatedly at given places.
> PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) is a penalty put on the cell n if:
• it is the immediately precedent cell on which the call has been,
• this cell belongs to the same BSC as the serving cell,
• the call has not performed a forced directed retry towards the serving cell,
• less than T_HCP seconds have elapsed since the last handover.
– In this case PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) = PING_PONG_HCP
> If the call was not precedently on cell n, or if the preceding cell was external, or if the call has just performed a forced directedretry, or if the timer T_HCP has expired,
– then PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) = 0
BS_TXPWR_MAX
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) _ _ )
HO_MARGIN (0,n)
T_HCP
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 116/331
© Alcatel 116
116@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
• ping_pong_margin example
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (7/11)
Cell Cell Cell
Case 1
Case 3
Case 2
OK1
Ping-pong in normal case OK with ping_pong_margin
Not a ping-pong case OK with ping_pong_margin and T_HCP
2
3
> This chart shows the efficiency of the anti-ping_pong mechanism.
> But, never forget that anti-ping-pong mechanism distorts the serving areas of the cells.
> This is why interference problems might occur when enabling this mechanism. Tuning PING_PONG_HCP parameter is thus very
important.
> Warning: this mechanism is not applied for emergency handovers (new mechanism in B7 exists for capture HO, based onT_INHIBIT_CPT timer).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 117/331
© Alcatel 117
117@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (8/11)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
> If EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)=ENABLE
> ThenPBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
+ max(0, DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n))(n=1…BTSnum)
> Else PBGT(n) > HO _MARGIN(0,n)+OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
> AND AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO ≤ RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
> AND EN_PBGT_HO = ENABLE
> Size of window for level averaging: A_PBGT_HO
> Cause 12 HO is correlated with HO cause 23. This is why there are two equations according to the activation of HO cause 23(EN_TRAFFIC_HO).
_ _ ,n
HO_MARGIN(0,n) OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
HO _MARGIN(0,n)+OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
A_PBGT_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 118/331
© Alcatel 118
118@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (9/11)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
> Mechanism to avoid PBGT HO if the level from the serving cellis high enough
> RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO: threshold above which it is notnecessary to trigger a handover on power budget
> AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO: average of the received levels overA_PBGT_HO measurements
> Specific to particular algorithms (not mentioned in this course)> OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER: offset which allows to take into
account the radio differences between outer and inner zones(especially in case of multi-band cells)
> RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO: Dense Network Handover Regulator features
> The feature aims at optimizing the better cell handovers, especially in the microcellular environment.
> In very dense networks, there is a lot of overlapping between adjacent cells: a better cell handover will be realized very often.
Since B6, the Alcatel BSS tunes the number of handovers performed to the accurate need by taking into account the levelreceived by the serving cell.
> Therefore, the best trade-off between quality of speech and intempestive handovers is achieved.
> Why?
• Especially in microcellular environment (where cell radius is smaller), the better cell HO (based on Power Budget) is likelyto be performed at a high rate to the detriment of the quality.
• But it is necessary to maintain the better cell HO.
> How?
• With a modification of the power budget triggering cause.
> Principles:
• HO cause 12 (Power Budget HO) is modified and takes into account the received downlink level of the serving cell (newcriterion): if the received level is high enough, there is no need to perform an HO.
> Consequence:
• Less HOs when the number of overlapping cells is high.
W/O B6 WITH B6
RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
A_PBGT_HO
OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 119/331
© Alcatel 119
119@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (10/11)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
> Specific to traffic considerations
> DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n): evaluated according to the traffic situationof the serving cell and the neighbor cell n (Traffic_load(n)) in thefollowing way:
> If Traffic_load(0) = high and Traffic_load(n) = low, – DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
> If Traffic_load(0) = low and Traffic_load(n) = high, – DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = DELTA_INC_HO_margin
> Else – DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = 0
> Philosophy
> This mechanism aims at penalizing cause 12 detection when thetraffic in the serving cell is low and is high in the cell n.
> DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) is evaluated according to the traffic situation of the serving cell and the neighbor cell n (Traffic_load(n))in the following way:
• If Traffic_load(0)=high and Traffic_load(n)=low
– DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)= -DELTA_DEC_HO_margin• If Traffic_load(0)=low and Traffic_load(n)=high
– DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)= DELTA_INC_HO_margin
• else DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)=0
where DELTA_DEC_HO_margin allows the cause 23 (traffic handover) detection.
> When the traffic in the serving cell is high and is low in the cell n:
• DELTA_INC_HO_margin allows to penalize the cause 12 detection when the traffic in the serving cell is low and is high inthe cell n.
Note:In the case of concentric or multiband cells, if the channel is in the inner zone (ZONE_TYPE = INNER), BS_TXPWR_MAX andMS_TXPWR_MAX in equation must be replaced by BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER and MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER respectively.
If the channel is in the outer zone (ZONE_TYPE = OUTER), the formulation of equation is not changed.
Note: The value of PBGT(n) is calculated every SACCH period for each neighbor cell n whose measures are kept in the book-keeping list.
_ _ _marg n
DELTA_INC_HO_margin
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 120/331
© Alcatel 120
120@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12: Power Budget (11/11)
> CAUSE 12: Power budget
> Traffic_load() is a function managed for every cell of a BSC
> Traffic_load() can have three values:
• high: cell is loaded
• low: cell is unloaded
• indefinite: cell is neither loaded nor unloaded
> Traffic_load() value is modified according to the long term trafficevaluation algorithm using the following parameters:
• A_TRAFFIC_LOAD, N_TRAFFIC_LOAD,HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD, IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD,LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD: can be modified per cell
• TCH_INFO_PERIOD: cannot be modified
> TCH_INFO_PERIOD = 5s period used by the BSC to count the number of free TCHs.
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD, N_TRAFFIC_LOAD,HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD, IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD,LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 121/331
© Alcatel 121
121@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 23: Traffic (1/2)
> CAUSE 23: Traffic Handover
> DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) < 0dB
> AND PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) +
OFFSET_HO_MARGNIN_INNER + DELTA_HO_MARGI(0,n)
(n=1…BTSnum)
> AND EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) = ENABLE
> Size of window for level averaging: A_PBGT_HO
> The principle of this handover is to reduce the size of the serving cell when it is high-loaded relatively to a low-loaded cell.
> When the mobile moves away from the BTS, the power budget will increase and a better cell handover will be triggered earlier.
> It is recommended to inhibit Traffic handover towards 1-TRX cells. These cells do not have enough resources to receive incoming
handovers due to congestion of neighbor cells. Moreover because of the great variation of traffic in the 1-TRX cells, traffic load isnever considered as low.
> This cause is inhibited for handover from SDCCH to SDCCH.
> Cause 23 is checked over all the neighboring cells belonging to the same layer. It means that it is checked between cells whoseCELL_LAYER_TYPE is single or upper, between cells whose CELL_LAYER_TYPE is lower, and between cells whoseCELL_LAYER_TYPE is indoor .
> In addition to the condition on the cell layer type, the cell frequency band condition for checking Cause 23 is as follows whether ornot the MS is in the inner zone of a multi-band cell:
• a) The MS is not in the inner zone of a multi-band cell
– If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to “disabled”, Cause 23 must not be checked between cells whichuse different frequency bands (i.e cells having different CELL_BAND_TYPE).
– If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to “enabled”, Cause 23 will be checked over all the neighboring
cells without any cell frequency band restriction.• b) The MS is in the inner zone of a multi-band cell
– If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to “disabled”, Cause 23 is checked over all the neighboring cellmulti-band cells (FREQUENCY_RANGE= PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800) which belong to the same BSCas the serving cell.
– If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to “enabled”, Cause 23 will be checked over all the neighboringcells without any cell frequency band restriction.
HO_MARGIN(0,n)
OFFSET_HO_MARGNIN_INNER
EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 122/331
© Alcatel 122
122@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 23: Traffic (2/2)
> CAUSE 23: Traffic Handover
• DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) computation is already described inCause 12 HO
• DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) < 0dB means that
– The serving cell is loaded
– The target cell is unloaded
• PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
+ DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) (n=1…BTSnum) – This constraint is less discriminative than Cause 12
– In specific traffic distribution, this cause is triggered before
cause 12
_ ,n _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 123/331
© Alcatel 123
123@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 12 & 23 interworking
> Cause 12 & 23: A dynamic way to handle traffic load
PBGT (n2)
PBGT (n1)
Traffic_loadTraffic_load(n2)=high
Traffic_load(n1)=low
Other cases Traffic_load(n2)=low
Traffic_load(n1)=high
HO_MARGING(n1, n2) + DELTA_INC_HO_margin
HO_MARGING(n1, n2)
HO_MARGING(n1, n2) - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
HO_MARGING(n2, n1) - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
HO_MARGING(n2, n1)
HO_MARGING(n2, n1) + DELTA_INC_HO_margin
PBGT Handover
PBGT Handover
2 x HO_MARGIN+ DELTA_INC_HO_margin- DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
2 x HO_MARGIN
PBGT Handover
Traffic Handover
PBGT Handover
Traffic Handover
Handover from n1 to n2
Handover from n2 to n1
N2 loaded
N1 loaded
> The figure represents the triggering areas of PBGT and traffic handovers according to the traffic load in the serving cell and in theneighbor cell.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 124/331
© Alcatel 124
124@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Directed Retry is:
• an SDCCH to TCH intercell handover
• Triggered during call setup procedure
> If the serving cell is completely congested, the MS is allocated anSDCCH
> If no TCH is available, the MS is queued
• Under certain conditions, the MS obtains TCH in another cell
> SDCCH-TCH handover on:
• better condition or emergency causes = Directed Retry• cause 20 = Forced Directed Retry
> Internal and External Directed Retries are possible (since B6.2)
2.5 Handover DetectionDirected Retry principles
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 125/331
© Alcatel 125
125@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Directed Retry
• Set on a per cell basis with parameter EN_DR
• Same behavior as TCH HO
• Intercell handover causes are checked (i.e. all HO causesexcept 10, 11 and 13 (concentric cells) and causes 15 and 16
(intracell HO))
• candidate cell evaluation process: same as for TCH HO
2.5 Handover DetectionDirected Retry
_
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 126/331
© Alcatel 126
126@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 20: Forced Directed Retry
AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
And EN_FORCED_DR = ENABLE
• EN_FORCED_DR value is only relevant if EN_DR = true
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is calculated with A_PBGT_DR window
• if less than A_PBGT_DR samples are available, the average valueis calculated with the available samples and the averaging windowis filled in with -110 dBm
2.5 Handover DetectionForced Directed Retry: cause 20
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
EN_FORCED_DR
_
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 127/331
© Alcatel 127
127@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Pre-ranking
• using PREF_LAYER, PRIORITY(0,n), frequency band
> Filtering process
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > RXLEVmin(n)+max(0,MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - P)
• Number of free TCHs t(n) > FREElevel_DR(n)
> Remaining cells are sorted according their PBGT_DR(n) (averagingwindow A_PBGT_DR)
• PBGT_DR(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) -AV_RXLEV_PBGT_DR -(BS_TXPWR_MAX - BS_TXPWR)
- (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX)
2.5 Handover DetectionFDR: Candidate cell evaluation
,n
RXLEVmin(n)MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
eve _ n
A_PBGT_DR
BS_TXPWR_MAX
S_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 128/331
© Alcatel 128
128@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n): level required in the neighbor cell n
– The parameter considered is the one set in the neighbor cell – The default value depends on network architecture
– See next slide
> Freelevel_DR(n): number of free TCH channels required in theneighbor cell n
– The parameter considered is the one set in the neighbor cell
– Default value = 0 to 4 TCHs (linked to the nb of TRXs)
> A_PBGT_DR: Averaging window
– Default value = 4 SACCHs
2.5 Handover DetectionFDR: parameters
_ _ _ n
ree eve _ n
_ _ :
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 129/331
© Alcatel 129
129@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 24: general capture
S e r v ing c e l l
Cell
Cell
Cell
Cell
> CAUSE 24: general capture
• Capture handover
– Modified in B8:Inhibition of capture handovers for “Singlelayer serving cell”
• May be triggered
– From all cells – Towards all cells except serving
– Can be used to capture traffic by any cell,whatever its type, band, etc.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 130/331
© Alcatel 130
130@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 24: general capture
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n ) > L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n) +
max (0, [MS_TXPWR_MAX(n ) - P])
and Traffic_load(0) = CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
and Traffic_load(n) ≠≠≠≠ HIGH
and EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO = ENABLE
• Size of window for averaging level: A_PBGT_HO
• CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION can take 3 values: ANY_LOAD(default), HIGH, NOT_LOW
• Anti ping-pong: not checked if T_INHIBIT_CPT is running – new inB8 for single layer
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 24: general capture
> Case the serving cell is in the upper or single layer (CELL_LAYER_TYPE(n 0) = upper or single ):
> Condition 1: The immediately preceding cell n -1
is in the indoor or lower layer, i.e. CELL_LAYER_TYPE(n –1
) = lower orindoor , or the frequency band of the immediately preceding cell n
-1is different from the frequency band of the serving cell n
0,
i.e. CELL_BAND_TYPE(n –1
) <> CELL_BAND_TYPE(n 0).
> Condition 2: The call has previously performed i) an emergency internal handover on quality (Cause 2, 4, and 7) towardsthe serving cell or ii) an external handover with the A interface GSM cause “uplink quality or downlink quality” and there is abi-directional adjacency link between the preceding external cell n
-1and the serving cell n
0.
– If Conditions 1 and 2 are fulfilled the timer T_INHIBIT_CPT is started
_ _ _ ,n
S_TXPWR_MAX(n )
_ _
EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
_ _
CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
T_INHIBIT_CPT
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 131/331
© Alcatel 131
131@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO (1/4)> CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic HO
• Push out of a cell a mobile in dedicated mode to allow a queued
request to be served in the serving cell
– Complement the current traffic HO (Cause 23), for suddentraffic peaks (no averaging window used)
– More efficient where the overlap of adjacent cells is reducedMost appropriate MS
to be pushed out
N e w
c a l l a tt e m p t
CongestedSer v ing cell
N e i ghbor c e l l Cell
N e i ghbor c e l l Cell
Upper layer cell
HO
HOMost appropriate MSto be pushed out
N e w
c a l l a tt e m p t
Congested
Ser v ing cell
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL( n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR( n) + max(0,[MS_TXPWR_MAX( n)-P])
– The threshold L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is the observed level from the neighbor cell n at the border of the areawhere fast traffic handovers are enabled. This threshold fixes the size of the overlapping area where fast traffic
handovers can be performed. It should be greater than RXLEVmin(n).• And t(n) > FREElevel_DR(n)
– FREElevel_DR(n) is the minimum threshold of free TCHs in the neighbor cell n for forced directed retry and fasttraffic handover.
– t(n) is the absolute number of free (dual rate) TCHs in the neighbor cell n.
– For external cells, t( n) is fixed to the arbitrary value t(n) = 255. Therefore, setting FREElevel_DR(n) to 255 for anexternal cell inhibits outgoing external fast traffic handover towards this cell. Setting FREElevel_DR(n) to any othervalue will allow outgoing external fast traffic handover towards this cell.
• EN_CAUSE_28 = enable
– The flag EN_CAUSE_28 is not an OMC flag but a HOP flag.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 132/331
© Alcatel 132
132@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO (2/4)> CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic Handover
• Cause 28 is only checked if the channel of the candidate MS cansupport the channel rate (HR or FR) required by the queued
request:
• HO is triggered when a request is queued at the top of the queue
Queued Request Candidate MS
HR
HR
HR orFR on dual rate TRX
FR (whatever the TRX type)FR
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 133/331
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 134/331
© Alcatel 134
134@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO (4/4)
> CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic Handover process
DHCPEND
- Cause number 28- Reference of the call to handover(which corresponds to the firstcandidate MS received)
Start HO
Assignment request queued - Queued request reference- Channel rate of queued request
Fast Traffic HO Request
Yes
EN_CAUSE_28=enable
EN_CAUSE_28=disable
HO alarm: cause 28?
NOK
DHCPEND
Request still queued?
Resource Allocation
Management
Handover
Preparation
T_FILTERis started
Handover
Management
OK
Check first 2 conditions of cause 28
- Queued request reference- Reference of MS can perform HO
Fast Traffic HO Acknowledge
Yes
No
NO
> HO cause 28 process:
• If EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = enable, when an assignment request (or external emergency HO request) is queued, theRAM process sends to the HOP process a Fast Traffic HO request which contains the queued request reference and its
channel rate.• Then, HO cause 28 becomes checkable (EN_CAUSE_28=enable).
• Once an HO alarm for cause 28 is triggered, the flag EN_CAUSE_28 is set to “disable” so as not to perform more thanone handover. In the same time, the HOP process gets back to the RAM process a Fast Traffic HO Acknowledge whichcontains the queued request reference and the reference of the MS that can perform HO.
• If several answers are sent to the RAM process, only the first one corresponding to the queued request is taken intoaccount.
– The RAM process checks if the request is still queued. If that is so, the RAM process asks the HOP process tostart HO for this mobile; otherwise the process is stopped.
• Once the HOP process receives this message, the first two conditions of Cause 28 (good enough level, enough freeresources in the target cell) are checked one more time. If the conditions are fulfilled, the HOP process sends an alarm tothe HOM entity and the timer T_FILTER is started ; otherwise the process is stopped.
Note: the first two conditions of cause 28 are tested twice in order to be sure that the candidate cells are still valid when the « cause
28 start HO » message is received from the RAM process.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 135/331
© Alcatel 135
135@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 15: High interference on the uplink
• Intracell HO
AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO > THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
AND AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_IH
AND EN_CAUSE_15 = ENABLE
AND [ no previous intracell handover for this connectionfailed
OR EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = ENABLE ]
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 15: UL Interference
> THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 and EN_CAUSE_15 are not parameters but variables defined just after.> In B7:
• New causes (26 & 27) introduced due to AMR support
– Cause 26 is an emergency condition:
– Intracell HO: speech codec from AMR-HR to AMR-FR
– Cause 27 is a better condition
– Intracell HO: speech codec from AMR-FR to AMR-HR
• Causes 15 & 16 are modified due to AMR support
– Specifics enablers and thresholds for AMR calls
– AMR emergency HO (cause 26) is triggered if cause 15 or 16 has already been triggered
• Cause 29 is created for intracell handover due to TFO
– Codec sharing and optimization for MTM calls
_ _
EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 136/331
© Alcatel 136
136@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CAUSE 16: High interference on the downlink
• Intracell HO
AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO > THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_16 +OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
AND AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_IH
AND EN_CAUSE_16 = ENABLE
AND [ no previous intracell handover for this connection failed
OR EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = ENABLE ]
• Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO
• Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover Cause 15: DL Interference
> THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_16 and EN_CAUSE_16 are not parameters but variables defined after.
_ _
EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
_ _
A_LEV_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 137/331
© Alcatel 137
137@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionNew parameters for causes 15 & 16
> CAUSE 15 and CAUSE 16:
• THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 (or 16) and EN_CAUSE_15 (or 16)are specific to HOP
• THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 (or 16) =
– L_RXQUAL_XX_H for a non AMR call (same threshold asCAUSE 2 or CAUSE 4)
– L_RXQUAL_XX_H_AMR for an AMR call
• EN_ CAUSE _15 (or 16) =
– EN_INTRA_XX for a non AMR call
– EN_INTRA_XX_AMR for an AMR call
> XX = UL or DL
> For a non AMR call, the thresholds used are identical to the ones used for CAUSE 2 and CAUSE 4.
> In this case and if EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = DISABLE, when aN HO CAUSE 15 (or 16) fails, it can be modified as UPLINK
(or DOWLINK) QUALITY, HO CAUSE 2 (respectively HO CAUSE 4).
_ _ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
L_RXQUAL_XX_H
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 138/331
© Alcatel 138
138@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAdaptive Multi-rate codec (AMR)
> Principles:
• Two consecutive encodings: speech coding and channel coding• With current codecs, the share of each coding is FIXED (not
optimized)
Speech protection"against degradation"
22.8 Kbit/s (FR TS)
Speech protection"against degradation"
11.4 Kbit/s (HR TS)
Channel coding
Channel coding
F I XE D F I XE D F I XE D
Radio
Radio
Speech coding
Speech information "useful part"
13 Kbit/sou 12.2 Kbit/s
(FR)(EFR)
Speech information "useful part"
5.6 Kbit/s (HR)
Speech coding
Voice
Voice
> Speech coding contains speech information (the “useful” part).
> Channel coding protects speech information (against radio degradations).
> The main speech codec currently used in GSM networks, speech Full Rate, is quite old. It has been specified more than 10 yearsago. Around 1992, to increase network capacity, GSM has specified a half rate speech codec. But this codec showed stronglimitations in terms of speech quality, especially for mobile to mobile calls (double transcoding degrades very much the speechquality of the half rate codec) and under poor radio conditions.
> Recently, studies on AMR have been launched to provide a solution to:
• Increase speech quality in full rate and half rate,
• Increase network capacity by offering a good half rate solution,
• Use a long-term solution, to avoid adding more and more codecs handled independently from the others.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 139/331
© Alcatel 139
139@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR: codec and channel adaptation
• AMR uses a variable balance between speech coding and channelcoding (CODEC Mode Adaptation)
• Choice between FR and HR Codecs: Channel Mode Adaptation
Variable channelcoding rate
22.8 Kbit/s (FR TS)
Variable channel
coding rate
Channel coding
Channel coding
Radio
Speech coding
Variable speech coding rate
Variable speech coding rate
Speech coding
Voice
Voice
F L E XIB L E
F L E XIB L E F L E XIB L E
4.75 Kbit/s5.15 Kbit/s5.9 Kbit/s
6.7 Kbit/s7.4 Kbit/s7.95 Kbit/s
10.2 Kbit/s12.2 Kbit/s
4.75 Kbit/s5.15 Kbit/s
5.9 Kbit/s6.7 Kbit/s
7.4 Kbit/s7.95 Kbit/s
11.4 Kbit/s (HR TS)(AMR HR 7.95 not supported)
Radio
> In order to adapt the intermediate rate, a set of speech codecs has been defined by ETSI to be used by AMR:
• When radio conditions are good, increases speech information.
• When radio conditions are bad, protects speech information.
> Full Rate: Alcatel implementation is fully compliant with GSM recommendations. All these AMR FR codec modes are supported.In particular, the Alcatel BSS has implemented the 7.95, 5.9 and 4.75 codec modes which use polynomials of constraint length 7to ensure a high protection.
> Half Rate: Alcatel implementation supports 5 out of 6 AMR HR codec modes (AMR HR 7.95 is not supported) which are fullycompliant with GSM recommendations. In particular, the Alcatel BSS has implemented the 4.75 codec mode which usespolynomials of constraint length 7 to ensure a high protection.
> During a call, only a subset out of these 8 codecs is used. The subset can include from 1 to 4 codecs. It is up to the operator todefine its own codec subset. In particular, he can define a codec subset limited to the common codec modes supported by all theBSSs of its network (some BSSs may not be able to support all of them due to implementability problems).The codec subset defined by the operator is the same in the uplink and in the downlink.
> Codec Mode adaptation:
– dynamic change from one codec to another, using the same channel (FR or HR).
– metric used: C/I (Carrier over interference ratio).
> Channel Mode adaptation:
– change from one FR channel to an HR one and vice-versa independently from the codec mode.
– metric used: RX_QUAL uplink and downlink.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 140/331
© Alcatel 140
140@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
• Based on adaptive trade-off between the share of throughput
given to speech coding and the one given to channel coding(speech protection)
• Depends on radio conditions estimated in real-time
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR codec adaptation objective
Mediumradio conditions
Badradio conditions
Goodradio conditions
Speech coding = speech information
Channel coding = speech protection
> The AMR principle is to have a set of codecs and, for any radio conditions, to use the one with the best speech quality.
• Under good radio conditions, a codec with a high bit rate is used. Speech is encoded with more information so the qualityis better. In the channel coding, only little place is left for redundancy.
• Under poor radio conditions, a codec with a low bit rate is chosen. Speech is encoded with less information, but thisinformation can be well protected due to redundancy in the channel coding.
> The BSS adapts dynamically the codec in uplink direction and in downlink direction, taking into account the C/I measured by theBTS (for uplink adaptation) and by the MS (for downlink adaptation).
> The codec used in the uplink and used in the downlink can be different: the adaptation is independent in each direction.
> This permits to use an optimal codec for each C/I value of each direction, as indicated in the figure below.
C/I [dB]
SpeechQuality[dBQ]
or[MOS]
High bit rate (for example 12.2 kbit/s: EFR)
Medium bit rate (for example 7.95 kbit/s)
Low bit rate (for example 5.90 kbit/s)
AMR-FR with codec subset (12.2, 7.95, 5.90)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 141/331
© Alcatel 141
141@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR: codec mode adaptation (1/3)
> Codec mode adaptation
• Only a subset out of these codecs can be used• This subset may include from 1 to 4 codecs
• The same codec subset is used for both the Uplink and theDownlink
• Uplink codec mode adaptation:
– For each SACCH frame, the BTS compares C/I value to thethreshold corresponding to the current codec (belonging tothe codec subset defined by the operator)
• Downlink codec mode adaptation:
– Same process as uplink adaptation – Nevertheless, the BTS remains the master
• Unrelated processes⇒ uplink and downlink codecs may bedifferent at a given time
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 142/331
© Alcatel 142
142@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR codec mode adaptation (2/3)
> The Codec mode can be modified on one frame out of two (CMI / CMC-CMR).
> Decision based on thresholds (OMC-R settable), for the uplink and thedownlink
AMR_FR_THR_3 + AMR_FR_HYST
C/I norm
AMR_FR_THY_3
AMR_FR_THR_2 + AMR_FR_HYST
AMR_FR_THR_2
Low
High
AMR_FR_THR_3 + AMR_FR_HYST
AMR_FR_THY_3
CODEC_MODE_4(less robust)
CODEC_MODE_3
CODEC_MODE_2
CODEC_MODE_1(most robust)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 143/331
© Alcatel 143
143@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR: codec mode adaptation (3/3)
Codec Mode Request (new codec mode)
Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode)
Codec Mode Request (new codec mode)
MS BTS TC
Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode)
C/I evaluation &
thresholds comparison
Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode)
Codec Mode Command (new codec mode)
MS BTS TC
Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode)
C/I evaluation &thresholds comparison
> Codec mode adaptation
• Uplinkadaptation
• Downlinkadaptation
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 144/331
© Alcatel 144
144@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR: codec and channel mode adaptation
> Codec mode adaptation is dynamically performed through a set of pre-
defined “codec modes”:
– In FR mode:
– In HR mode:
> Choice between HR and FR (Channel mode adaptation) is done atcall setup and during call through HO causes 26 & 27
Variable speech coding rate
Channel coding
Speech coding
Variable speech coding rate
To endof chain
Fromacoustic part
22.8 Kbit/s (FR TS)
12.2 Kbit/s10.2 Kbit/s7.95 Kbit/s7.4 Kbit/s
6.7 Kbit/s5.9 Kbit/s5.15 Kbit/s4.75 Kbit/s
12.2 Kbit/s10.2 Kbit/s7.95 Kbit/s7.4 Kbit/s
6.7 Kbit/s5.9 Kbit/s5.15 Kbit/s4.75 Kbit/s
Variable speech coding rate
Channel coding
Speech coding
Variable speech coding rate
Fromacoustic part
To endof chain
11.4 Kbit/s (HR TS)
7.4 Kbit/s
6.7 Kbit/s5.9 Kbit/s
5.15 Kbit/s
4.75 Kbit/s
7.4 Kbit/s
6.7 Kbit/s5.9 Kbit/s
5.15 Kbit/s
4.75 Kbit/s
> Codec mode adaptation:
> The codec mode adaptation is the dynamic change from one codec to another codec, using the same channel (FR or HR). Thisadaptation is performed by the layer 1 of the BTS. It is transparent for the BSC and the layer 3 of the BTS.
> The metric used for codec mode adaptation is the evaluation of the ratio: signal over noise.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 145/331
© Alcatel 145
145@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR gain
> AMR: always gives end user the best satisfaction
• Comparison between different codecs in terms of capacity andquality:
Speech qualityrequirement
AMR-FR + AMR-HR
AMR-HR
AMR-FR
HR
EFR
FR
Capacityrequirement
> The main speech codec currently used in GSM networks, speech Full Rate, is quite old. It has been specified more than 10 yearsago.
> Around 1992, to increase network capacity, GSM has specified a half rate speech codec. But this codec showed strong limitationsin terms of speech quality, especially for mobile to mobile calls (double transcoding degrades very much the speech quality of thehalf rate codec) and under poor radio conditions.
> A few years later, when GSM started to be introduced in North America, American operators asked for an improved speech codecfor full rate channels. Indeed speech quality was a major argument for customers used to have a good speech quality with analogsystems. For that issue, EFR was specified for GSM.
> Recently, studies on AMR have been launched to provide a solution to:
• Increase speech quality in full rate and half rate,
• Increase network capacity by offering a good half rate solution,
• Use a long-term solution, to avoid adding more and more codecs handled independently from the others,
• Take into account Tandem Free Operation (TFO), especially between MSs on half rate on one side and on full rate on the
other side.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 146/331
© Alcatel 146
146@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> FR / HR discrimination
• Cell load AV_LOAD() computed from – load samples = NB_BUSY_TS / NB_TS * 100
– non sliding window (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) averaging process
2.5 Handover DetectionAMR: TCH allocation
AV_LOAD
Time
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 = 80%
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 = 60%
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 = 50%
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 = 40%
100%
FR for any MS
HR for AMR MSFR for other MS
HR for any MS
HR for AMR MSFR for other MS
FR for any MS
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1=
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3=
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1=
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3=
> Load samples are computed by the BSC every TCH_INFO_PERIOD = 5 seconds.
> LOAD_EV_PERIOD is the averaging window size for cell load computation. It is equal to 12 but can be changed at the OMC-Rlevel on a per cell basis.
> Therefore cell load process has a periodicity of 1mn by default (TCH_INFO_PERIOD*LOAD_EV_PERIOD).
> The allocation of Half rate resources is decided upon the load evaluation in the serving cell.
> AMR HR (HR SV3) offers a better speech quality than HR SV1. The Alcatel BSS offers thus the possibility to define a set ofthresholds specific for AMR. If the load increases, AMR HR capable MSs can be the first to be allocated in HR (HR SV3) for loadreasons, and if the load still increases, then all the HR capable MSs can be allocated in HR (HR SV1 & HR SV3) for load reasons.
• This is why two variables of load are defined: LOAD_SV3 and LOAD_SV1.
> Each load variable is calculated through its own threshold set: the thresholds related to the variable LOAD_SV3(THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) are less restrictive than the ones related to the variable LOAD_SV1(THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1).
• As a consequence, if the load of the cell increases, then the variable LOAD_SV3 will first equal TRUE, and if the load stillincreases, the variable LOAD_SV1 will then equal TRUE.
> The variable LOAD_SV1 corresponds to a level of load where it is important to put as many MSs on half rate TCH as possible:HR SV3 or HR SV1.
> The same computation is done to compute LOAD_SV3 with the thresholds: THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3with the following relations:
• THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 ≤ THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
• THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 ≤ THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
• THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 ≤ THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Previous stateAV_LOAD
LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = TRUE
AV_LOAD ≤ THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = FALSE
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <
AV_LOAD ≤
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = TRUE
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 < AV_LOAD LOAD_SV1 = TRUE LOAD_SV1 = TRUE
LOAD_EV_PERIOD
_ _ _ _
_ _ _ = _
TH _ _ _ _ =
_ _ _ _ =
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 147/331
© Alcatel 147
147@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 26: AMR HR to FR HO (1/4)
> CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
• Cause 26 is triggered if :
– Current channel rate is HR
– Current channel is dual rate and changes are allowed
– AMR_FR speech codec is allowed:
EN_AMR_FR = ENABLE _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 148/331
© Alcatel 148
148@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 26: AMR HR to FR HO (2/4)
> CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR) equation
> [ a previous intracell HO cause 15 or 16 has been triggered for this callin the serving cellOREN_INTRA_DL_AMR = DISABLE and EN_INTRA_UL_AMR =DISABLE]
> ANDAV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_HR_FR > THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_CA+ OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_IHORAV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_HR_FR > THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_CA+ OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_IH
> AND EN_AMR_CA = ENABLE
> Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
_ _ _ _ _ _
_ _
EN_AMR_CA
A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 149/331
© Alcatel 149
149@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 26: AMR HR to FR HO (3/4)
> CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
• THR_RXQUAL_CA and OFFSET_CA are set as follows :
if LOAD_SV3(0) = false then
THR_RXQUAL_CA = THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
OFFSET_CA = OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
if LOAD_SV3(0) = true then
THR_RXQUAL_CA = THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
OFFSET_CA = OFFSET_CA_HIGH
_ _ _
OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
_ _ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 150/331
© Alcatel 150
150@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 26: AMR HR to FR HO (4/4)
> CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
• Calculation of LOAD_SV3(0):
If previous value of LOAD_SV3 = false then
If AV_LOAD > THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 then
LOAD_SV3 = trueElse LOAD_SV3 = false
Else (if previous value of LOAD_SV3 = true then)
If AV_LOAD <= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 then
LOAD_SV3 = falseElse LOAD_SV3 = true
_ _ _ _
_ _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 151/331
© Alcatel 151
151@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 27: AMR FR to HR HO (1/2)
> CAUSE 27: AMR channel adaptation HO (FR to HR)
> Cause 27 is triggered if :
– Current channel rate is FR
– Current channel is dual rate and changes are allowed
– AMR_HR speech codec is allowed:
EN_AMR_HR = ENABLE _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 152/331
© Alcatel 152
152@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 27: AMR FR to HR HO (2/2)
> CAUSE 27: AMR channel adaptation HO (FR to HR) equation
> AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_FR_HR <= THR_RXQUAL_CA+ OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
> ANDAV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_FR_HR <= THR_RXQUAL_CA
+ OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
> AND EN_AMR_CA = ENABLE
> Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
EN_AMR_CA
A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 153/331
© Alcatel 153
153@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 26 & 27 interworking
> Cause 26 & 27 interaction
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Quality
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL +OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH +OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Bad quality: 7
Bad quality: 7
Load = False Load = True
Half Rate
Full Rate
Half Rate
Full Rate
HO cause 26
HO cause 27
HO cause 26
HO cause 27
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 154/331
© Alcatel 154
154@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionIntroduction to TFO (1/2)
> Tandem Free Operation (TFO) solution
TC TC
Codec GSM (A)(8 or 16 Kbit/s)
MS A MS B
Codec GSM (B)(8 or 16 Kbit/s)
A/µ law(64 Kbit/s)
Double transcoding without TFO
TC TC
Codec GSM (A)(8 or 16 Kbit/s)
MS A MS B
No transcoding withTFO
> The Tandem Free Operation (TFO) feature is a way to avoid double transcoding in mobile to mobile speech calls.
> Indeed without TFO, one GSM codec type is used between the first mobile and the first transcoder, then the speech is transcodedinto A/ µ law between transcoders and finally this speech is transcoded again into a second GSM codec type (which may be the
same as the first one) between the second transcoder and the second mobile.
> With TFO, after call establishment, both BSSs at each side are able to negotiate a common GSM codec type which is then usedfrom one mobile to the other mobile. This negotiation is performed through in-band signaling between transcoders.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 155/331
© Alcatel 155
155@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionIntroduction to TFO (2/2)
> Applicability: Only MS to MS speech calls
> TFO is based on information exchanged between transcoders
TRAU
MS MSBTS
64 Kbit/s Speech Sample carrying:
- TFO frames on the LSB containing:
- compressed speech samples - control bits - TFO messages
- original PCM speech samples on the MSB
TRAU
BSC
IPE
MSC
IPE
MSC
BTS
BSC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 156/331
© Alcatel 156
156@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTFO principles
> In the case of first allocation (normal assignment at call setup, inter-
BSS handover, intra-BSS handover where no TFO was previously on-going):
Exchange of Codec capabilities
New call setup
Match
Found
Yes No
Look for common codec
NoYes
Normal operationTFO mode ON
Intracell HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 157/331
© Alcatel 157
157@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO HO
> CAUSE 29: TFO HO
• Intracell HO used in case of codec mismatch between two MSscalling, in order to match their speech codec
• No radio measurements needed No priority and may betriggered at any time
• Conditions:
HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = ENABLEAND
EN_TFO_MATCH = ENABLE
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 158/331
© Alcatel 158
158@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO parameters (1/5)
> EN_TFO
– enables/disables the feature, per cell
> EN_TFO_MATCH
– enables/disables resolution of codec mismatch, per cell
> EN_TFO_OPT
– enables/disables codec optimization, per cell
> FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
– enables/disables the basic functions of TFO for GSM EFR, FRand HR codec types when the current codec is AMR FR orAMR HR
> FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
– controls the establishment of TFO in HR when the cell isloaded
> KEEP_CODEC_HO
– indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec in case ofinternal intercell HO
> Codec mismatch:
• At call setup for a mobile to mobile speech call, when both BSSs do not use the same codec type, a codec mismatchoccurs. If a common codec type can be found, either one or possibly both BSSs perform an intracell handover to use thecommon codec type found. Afterwards TFO can be started using this common codec type. Codec mismatch resolution isauthorized in the BSC using an O&M flag: EN_TFO_MATCH. This flag is forwarded to the TC, via the BTS.
> Codec optimization:
• At call setup for a mobile to mobile speech call, it can occur that a first common codec type can be found but a betterspeech quality would be provided with another common codec type. Once both BSSs operate in Tandem Free, theyexchange their complete codec capabilities, to try to find a better codec type than the current one. Codec optimization isauthorized in the BSC using an O&M flag : EN_TFO_OPT. This flag is forwarded to the TC, via the BTS.
> Classification of codec types :
• In all cases, TFO is considered better as any tandeming configuration. In TFO, EFR is considered as better than FR,considered as better than HR.
> Force TFO vs. AMR :
• TFO + AMR is not supported in this implementation of TFO. In the normal operation, a call established with AMR will notinitiate a TFO negotiation. The goal of the function Force TFO vs. AMR is to allow a call, established with AMR to initiate aTFO negotiation and, if possible, to change of codec type to FR, HR or EFR to establish TFO.
> In-Path Equipments (IPEs):
• TFO can only be activated if TFO frames (at 8 or 16 Kbit/s) can be sent transparently through the public switchingnetwork. In-path equipments are equipments such as echo cancelers or A/ µ law converters that modify the 64 Kbit/sspeech signal. Such equipments need to be deactivated for TFO calls.
EN_TFO
EN_TFO_MATCH
_ _
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 159/331
© Alcatel 159
159@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO parameters (2/5)
> EN_TFO_OPT: enables/disables codec optimization, per cell
• Allows new TFO negotiation on an on-going MTM call to find abetter common codec
– For example, HR is used at both sides, but FR is possibletoo
– HO cause 29 will be triggered on both sides towards bestcodec
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 160/331
© Alcatel 160
160@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO parameters (3/5)
> FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR:
• TFO AMR not specified – Call setup in AMR is not followed by TFO negotiation
– FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR enables HO cause 29 after AMRcall establishment towards best TFO codec
ERF + TFOThe MS A can only use HR/EFR/FR
The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR
C ell ca p :A M R / HR/EF R/ F R
C ell ca p :H R / EFR/ F R
The MS A using AMR, could use HR/EFR/FR
The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR
MS A MS B
TFO not possible
Enable (Alcatel patent)
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
Disabled(ETSI implementation)
_ _ _
_ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 161/331
© Alcatel 161
161@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO parameters (4/5)
> FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED:
• Gives control on load regulation precedence vs. TFO – 3 values: TFO_HR_NOT_FORCED, TFO_HR_ONLY,
TFO_HR_PREFERRED enable different behaviours in caseof loaded cell
HR + TFOThe MS A can only use HR
The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR
L o aded c e l lM S / cell c a p :
U n l oaded c e l lM S / cell c a p :
The MS A can use HR/EFR/FR
The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR
MS A MS B
EFR + TFO
Enable (Alcatel patent)
FORCE_TFO_HR_ WHEN_LOADED
Disabled(ETSI implementation)
H / EFR/F R H R / EFR/ F R
_ _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 162/331
© Alcatel 162
162@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 29: TFO parameters (5/5)
> KEEP_CODEC_HO
• keeps the same codec type in the new cell in case of internalintercell HO in order to avoid resolving a new mismatch codec
situation
• Avoids double speech quality transition:
TFO --> non-TFO --> TFO
• 3 possible behaviors:
– TFO_CALLS_ONLY: codec is preferably kept in case of
internal intercell HO for TFO calls only
– ALL_CALLS: codec is preferably kept in case of internal
intercell HO for all calls (whatever the TFO state)
– FREE: the choice of the codec type is free and depends on
the situation in the target cell
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 163/331
© Alcatel 163
163@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionCause 30: Move from PS to CS zone
> If EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO = enable
> AND a CS call is inside both
• The Non pre-emptable zone and
• The MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_ZONE then
> An intra cell HO cause 30 is triggered
TRX3 TRX1
BCCH SDCCH
PS PS PS PSCS CS CS
Non pre-emptable zone
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone
PS traffic zone
HO cause 30
PS PS
B9
> The enabling/disabling of Cause 30 is independent of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.
> MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD consecutive PS capable timeslotsthat are preferred for PS allocation. In this zone, allocated TBFs cannot be pre-empted. If the value ofMAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD is not modified, this zone remains unchanged.
> Non pre-emptable PS zone: this zone is always inside the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone. In this latter zone, we search forthe rightest timeslot allocated to the MFS and used. Then, all timeslots situated at its left define this non pre-emptable PS zone.
> MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT consecutive PS capable timeslots that arepreferred for PS allocation.
> PS traffic zone: this zone corresponds to the larger zone between the non pre-emptable PS zone and the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
zone.
EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 164/331
© Alcatel 164
164@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionHandover causes priorities
Emergency Handover
Uplink Quality Cause 2
Downlink Quality Cause 4
Uplink Level Cause 3
Downlink Level Cause 5
Distance Cause 6
Too Low Level UL Inner Cause 10
Too Low Level DL Inner Cause 11
HR to FR Channel Adaptation Cause 26 intracell
Uplink Interference Cause 15 intracell
Downlink Interference Cause 16 intracell
Better Condition Handover
Capture Handover Cause 24
Power Budget Cause 12
Traffic Cause 23
Outer UL/DL Level Cause 13
FR to HR Channel Adaptation Cause 27 intracell
Forced Directed Retry Cause 20
Fast Traffic HO Cause 28
HANDOVER PRIORITIES
TFO
Move from PS to CS Zone
29
30
> The causes 24, 12 and 23 have the same priority. Nevertheless, if a cell is a candidate for both causes, triggered in the sametime, it is kept only for cause 12.
> Dealing with all available causes, we get the following list:• Emergency: 7 > 17 > 18 > 2 > 4 > 3 > 5 > 6 > 22 > 10 > 11 > 26 > 15 > 16
• Better conditions: 21=14=24=12=23 > 13 > 27 > 20 > 28
• 29 has no priority
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 165/331
© Alcatel 165
165@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Emergency causes
1- What is the HO cause 2?2- Which is the flag to activate the HO
cause 2?
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (1/9)
Time allowed:
45 minutes
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 166/331
© Alcatel 166
166@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Emergency causes
Complete the diagram below and fill in the chart with:L_RXQUAL_UL_H = 3
RXLEV_UL_IH = -70 dBm
P=MS_TXPWR_MAX=33dBm
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (2/9)
Quality
Level
Nb of case
AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO
AV_RXLEV_UL_HO
Current MS power
HO cause 2: YES/NO?
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 1 3 4 4 4
-81 -79 -75 -70 -69 -72
33 33 33 33 3329
(0.8 w)
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 167/331
© Alcatel 167
167@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (3/9)
> Better condition causes (simple case)
• There are only 2W cells and 2W MS• EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Disable
• No Ping-Pong margin
• HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dB
• NO DL PC,RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_LIMIT=-47dBm,The serving is not a concentric cell.
> Fill up the chart:
S e r v ing c e l l N cel l
Nb of case
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n)
AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
PBGT(n)
HO cause 12: YES/NO?
1 2 3 4 5 6
-70 -70 -80 -70 -70 -75
-80 -70 -75 -75 -79 -96
_ _ ,n
HO_MARGIN(0,n)
RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_LIMIT
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 168/331
© Alcatel 168
168@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (4/9)
> Better condition causes (ping-pong case)
• EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Disable• Ping-Pong margin
PING_PONG_HCP=15dbT_HCP =15s
• HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dBA_PBGT_HO = 8 SACCHA n to 0 HO has just been triggered, what happens after 4s?
N cel lS e r v ing c e l l
?
Nb of case
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n)
AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
PBGT(n) «a» only
HO cause 12: YES/NO? PBGT>HO margin
PING_PONG_HCP=15 -> PBGT(n)
HO cause 12:YES/NO?
1 2 3 4 5 6
-70 -70 -80 -70 -70 -75
-80 -70 -75 -75 -79 -96
10 0 -5 5 9 21
YES NO NO NO YES YES
_ _ ,n
PING_PONG_HCP
HO_MARGIN(0,n)A_PBGT_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 169/331
© Alcatel 169
169@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercise (5/9)
> Training exercise: Handover Detection
• Better condition causes (traffic case)• EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Enable
• No Ping-Pong margin
• HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dB
• DELTA_DEC_HO_margin =5dB
• DELTA_INC_HO_margin =5dB N cel lS e r v ing c e l l
HO
_ _ ,n
HO_MARGIN(0,n)
_ _ _marg n
DELTA_INC_HO_margin
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 170/331
© Alcatel 170
170@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Better condition causes (traffic case)
Fill up the chart:
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (6/9)
N cel lS e r v ing c e l l
HO ?
Nb of case
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n)
AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
Traffic distribution
PBGT(n)
DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0, n)
Cause 12 HO: YES/NO?
Cause 23 HO: YES/NO?
1 2 3 4
-71 dBm -71 dBm -76 dBm -71 dBm
-80 dBm -80 dBm -80 dBm -80 dBm
0: traffic lowN: traffic high
0: traffic highN: traffic low
0: traffic highN: traffic low
0: traffic lowN: traffic high
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 171/331
© Alcatel 171
171@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (7/9)
> Channel adaptation (cause 26 and cause 27)
1- Why is it recommended to have A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR ≥A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR ?
2- An operator may be willing to:
- Under normal load, use only HR calls for quality 0
- Under high load, use HR calls for qualities 0 to 3, with an
hysteresis of 1
Find the thresholds and offsets for normal and high load:
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL = ? OFFSET_CA_NORMAL = ?
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH = ? OFFSET_CA_HIGH = ?
_ _ _ _ A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
_ _ _
OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 172/331
© Alcatel 172
172@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (8/9)
> Capture HO (Cause 24 )
• There are only 2W cells and 2W MS• L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n) = -85dBm
• EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO = ENABLE
>
> Fill up the chart: N cel lS e r v ing c e l l
HO ?
Nb of case 1 2 3 4 5 6
AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - 70 - 70 - 80 - 70 - 70 - 85
CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION NOT_LOW HIGH ANY_LOAD HIGH HIGH HIGH
TRAFFIC_LOAD(0) HIGH LOW INDEFINITE HIGH LOW HIGH
TRAFFIC_LOAD(n) HIGH LOW INDEFINITE LOW LOW LOW
HO cause 24: YES/NO?
_ _ _ ,n
EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 173/331
© Alcatel 173
173@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.5 Handover DetectionTraining exercises (9/9)
> Fast Traffic HO (cause 28)
> Find the appropriate candidate MS for this queued request:• Channel rate required: HR
• L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) = -85 dBm (whatever n)
• FREElevel_DR(n) = 1 (whatever n)
• Channel rate: MS1FR on Full rate TRX, MS2HR, MS3FRon Dual rate TRX
• t(n) for neighbor cells: t(1)=1, t(2)=2, t(3)=2
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) in dBm:
Neighbors
MS 1
MS 2
MS 3
1 2 3
- 82 dBM
- 79 dBM
- 90 dBM
- 85 dBM
- 86 dBM
- 82 dBM
- 78 dBM
- 92 dBM
- 89 dBM
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
FREElevel_DR(n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 174/331
© Alcatel 174
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 175/331
© Alcatel 175
175@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Used to rank potential target cells:
• Ranking based on radio characteristics
• Ranking based on operator preferences
• Ranking based on traffic intensity
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationPrinciples
Radio
Link
Measurements
Active
Channel
Pre-processing
BTS BSC
HO Detection HO Candidate
Cell Evaluation
HO
management
MSC
HO
protocol
HO Preparation
> Handover candidate cell evaluation
• The process is performed in the BSC.
• Once a need for handover is detected, this process looks for possible target cells (except if it is an intracell handover or aninterzone handover) and provides the BSC entity in charge of the HO decision and execution entity with a list of candidatecells and their respective HO cause.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 176/331
© Alcatel 176
176@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationEvaluation process
Measurement Preprocessing
A_LEV_HO
A_QUAL_HOA_PBGT_HO
A_RANGE_HO
HO Detection
Cause 2: uplink quality
Cause 3: uplink level
Cause 4: downlink quality
Cause 5: downlink level
Cause 6: distance
Cause 12: power budget
Performed every SACCH Performed every SACCH
Pre-ranking
Priority (0, n) = 0
Cell 2: cause C2
Cell 3: cause C2
Cell 4: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 1
Cell 1: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 2Priority (0, n) = 3
Cell 5: cause C2
Cell 6: cause C2
Cell 7: cause C2
Cell 8: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 4
Priority (0, n) = 5
Priority (0, n) = 0
Cell 2: cause C2
Cell 3: cause C2
Cell 4: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 1
Priority (0, n) = 2Priority (0, n) = 3
Cell 6: cause C2
Cell 8: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 4
Priority (0, n) = 5
PBGT filtering HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)
Grade
Priority (0, n) = 0
Cell 4: cause C2
Cell 2: cause C2
Cell 3: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 1
Priority (0, n) = 2
Priority (0, n) = 3
Cell 6: cause C2
Cell 8: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 4
Priority (0, n) = 5
Order
Priority (0, n) = 0
Cell 4: cause C2
Cell 3: cause C2
Cell 2: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 1
Priority (0, n) = 2
Priority (0, n) = 3
Cell 6: cause C2
Cell 8: cause C2
Priority (0, n) = 4
Priority (0, n) = 5
Cell evaluation process (Order or Grade)
HO Candidate Cells Evaluation
Max
every SACCH
Preprocessmeasurement
Measurementresult
Raw cell list
Cell 1: cause C2
Cell 2: cause C2
Cell 3: cause C2
Cell 4: cause C2
Cell 5: cause C2
Cell 6: cause C2
Cell 7: cause C2
Cell 8: cause C2
... max 32 cells
> The HO candidate evaluation process is run after all intercell handover alarms.
> In case of intracell handover alarm (HO causes 10, 11, 13, 15, 16), the candidate cell evaluation process is skipped: the target cellis the serving cell.
> The handover detection gives as indication the raw cell list (built from book-keeping list) and the preferred layer for the handover.In case of emergency handover alarms or cause 20 alarm, the cell evaluation will order the cells given in the raw list, putting in thefirst position the cells belonging to the preferred layer, having the highest priority (if EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING=ENABLE) and/orhaving the same frequency band type as the serving cell. In case of an intercell handover alarm, if the serving cell belongs tothe raw cell list (emergency handover from the DCS 1800 inner zone of a multiband cell), this cell is put at the end of thecandidate cell list with the MS zone indication OUTER.
> In case of better condition handover alarms (except cause 20), the cell evaluation will order the cells given in the raw list, puttingin the first position the cells belonging to the preferred layer and having the highest priority (ifEN_PRIORITY_ORDERING=ENABLE).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 177/331
© Alcatel 177
177@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Pre-ranking in hierarchical or multi-band networks:
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationPre-ranking
Priority(0,n) = 0Cell_layer_type = Pref_layer
Cell_band_type = serving_cell
Priority(0,n) = 1
Priority(0,n) = 5
Cell_band_type = serving_cell
Priority(0,n) = 0Cell_layer_type = Pref_layer
Priority(0,n) = 1
Priority(0,n) = 5
List ofcandidate
cells n
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 178/331
© Alcatel 178
178@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationPre-ranking
> with priority(0,n) settings, the operator can, for each couple of cells:
• tag the target cell with a defined priority (from 0 = max to 5 = min)• this definition has an higher priority than usual order/grade ranking
> especially useful for multi band/hierarchical architectures:
• a simple way to force a target cell whatever its RxLev level and PBGT
• nevertheless can be skipped over by filtering processes
• low interest for standard networks
RxLev: - 90 dBmPBGT: + 5 dB
S e r v ing c e l l
C a n d idate c e l l 1
C a n d idate c e l l 2
RxLev: - 70 dBm
PBGT: + 10 dB
Priority
P1
P0
> Cell ordering according to target layer and target band
> In hierarchical or multiband environment, cells are characterized by the layer they belong to or/and the frequency band they use.The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account these characteristics in the candidate cell ordering.
> In hierarchical environment, the HO detection process can indicate a preferred layer where the handover must be directed to. Ifthis indication is used, the candidate cell evaluation puts in the first places of the list, the candidate cells belonging to the preferredlayer. They are followed by the cells of the other layer, providing they are also correct candidates.
> After this possible distinction, in each part of the list, the candidate cell evaluation sorts the candidate cells according to theparameter PRIORITY(0,n) (parameter on line changeable from the OMC-R).
> The cells having the highest priority are put in the first place of the list. They are followed by the cells having the lowest priorities.The PRIORITY(0,n) is only used when the flag EN_PRIORTY_ORDERING is set to “enable”.
> In case of emergency handover, for each category (preferred layer and other layer) and between cells having the same priority,the candidate cell evaluation sorts the candidate cells according to the frequency band they use: the cells which use the samefrequency band as the serving cell are put first and they are followed by the cells which use the other frequency band.
> The cell evaluation function is then applied to the different candidate cell lists defined from the preferred layer indication, thePRIORITY(0,n) parameter and the frequency band of the serving cell (only in case of emergency handover).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 179/331
© Alcatel 179
179@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationPBGT Filtering
> PBGT filtering:
• optional, flag EN_PBGT_FILTERING
• filter out cells from the target list
• inhibited for better cell handovers
• based on power budget
• per couple of cells
• was needed for multiband architecture
• PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
– HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_QUAL (0,n)for cause 2,4 – HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_LEV (0,n) for cause 3,5
– HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_DIST (0,n) for cause 6
– OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER is only applied when the MS is in the innerzone of a concentric or multi band cell
– The averaging window is A_PBGT_HO
> The filtering process allows to filter out cells from the target list before sending them to the ORDER or GRADE evaluationprocess.
> It can be enabled/disabled on-line on a per cell basis from the OMC-R with the flag EN_PBGT_FILTERING.
> The candidate cells are filtered on their power budget in relation to a handover margin threshold based on the handover cause.
Note: the averaging window used for this process is A_PBGT_HO (even for emergency handovers, where a handover alarm couldhave been raised through A_LEV_HO or A_QUAL_HO samples)
_ _
_ _ _
O_MARGIN_QUAL (0,n) _ _ ( ,n
O_MARGIN_DIST (0,n)
OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
A_PBGT_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 180/331
© Alcatel 180
180@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> ORDER cell evaluation process
Cell "n" is ranked among other accordingly:
If EN_LOAD_ORDER = ENABLE and cell n is internal to the BSCORDER (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) + FREEfactor(n)- FREEfactor(0)- HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)
• Link_factor (0,n) is an operator parameter to give a bonus/penalty to
a cellex: avoid external HO, decrease incoming flow of HO to a cell from
another• FREEfactor is TCH traffic based bonus/penalty to rank cells
If EN_LOAD_ORDER = DISABLE or cell n is external to the BSCORDER (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) - HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)
Cell "n" is kept if:• AV_RXLEV_NCELL (n) > RXLEVmin (n)
+ max [0;(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)-P)] [dBm]
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationORDER evaluation
> Two types of cell evaluation algorithms can be used: ORDER and GRADE.
> ORDER and GRADE are two different methods of cell ranking. They both consist in giving a mark or ’figure of merit’ to eachcandidate cell.
> The basic differences between ORDER and GRADE are that:
• with ORDER
– The candidate cell evaluation process interacts with the handover detection by use of cause-dependent handovermargins.
– The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cells.
• with GRADE
– The candidate cell evaluation process does not interact with the handover detection.
– The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account the relative load of traffic channels in the candidate cells.
> The type of cell evaluation is chosen by the operator on a (serving) cell basis and is provided to the BSC with the parameter
CELL_EV.
> For any handover cause, the first cell in the list is taken as a target cell, i.e. the cell with the highest value of ORDER(n). The cellsdo not need to fulfil any other condition.
> If no cell fulfils the condition and the serving cell does not belong to the target cell list, the target cell list is empty and no furtheraction is carried out.
Note: the A_PBGT_HO averaging window is used for this process.
EN_LOAD_ORDER _ ,n actor n
- FREEfactor(0)- HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)n _ actor ,n
_ _ LINK_FACTOR(0,n) - HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)
m n n MS_TXPWR_MAX(n
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 181/331
© Alcatel 181
181@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> GRADE cell evaluation processCell "n" is ranked among other accordingly:
If EN_LOAD_ORDER = ENABLE and cell n is internal to the BSC
GRADE (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) + LOADfactor(n)
• Link_factor (0,n) is an operator parameter to give a
bonus/penalty to a cell
• LOADfactor(n) is a weighting factor that takes into account therelative load of traffic channels in a cell
If EN_LOAD_ORDER = DISABLE or cell n is external to the BSC
GRADE (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n)> Cell "n" is kept if:
• AV_RXLEV_NCELL (n) > RXLEVmin(n)+ max [0;(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)-P)]
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationGRADE Evaluation
> LINKfactor(0,n) is a parameter set by OMC command for each cell(n).
> LINKfactor(n1,n2) allows the operator to handicap or to favor the cell n1 with respect to its neighbor cell n2. In particular, it can beused to disadvantage an external cell when an internal cell is also a possible candidate.
> For any handover cause, the first cell in the list is taken as a target cell, i.e. the cell with the highest value of GRADE(n). If no cellfulfils the condition and the serving cell does not belong to the target cell list, the target cell list is empty and no further action iscarried out.
Note: the A_PBGT_HO averaging window is used for this process
_ _
_ ,n + actor n
Link_factor (0,n)
actor n
_ _
_ ,n
m n n _ _ n
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 182/331
© Alcatel 182
182@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationTraining exercise (1/2)
> Emergency HO detected
• With the “Candidate evaluation.xls” excel sheet...» Filtering simulation for a list of candidate cells
» Ranking simulation for a list of candidate cellsCandidate Cell Evaluation
Serving cell Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 Cell 4 Cell 5 Cell 6
RxLev_cell1Mk RxLev_DL Cell_Nb1 BSIC_cell1 Cell_Nb2 BSIC_cell2RxLev_cell2 Cell_Nb3 BSIC_cell3RxLev_cell3 Cell_Nb4 BSIC_cell4RxLev_cell4 Cell_Nb5 BSIC_cell5RxLev_cell5 Cell_Nb6 BSIC_cell6RxLev_cell6
-102** 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-99** 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-99** 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110
-98AssCmd 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110
-110AssCmp
0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-76** 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110
-96** 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-95** 14 3 -91 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-93** 14 3 -92 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110
-93** 1 0 -89 14 3 -91 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-93** 1 0 -90 14 3 -94 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110-93** 1 -0 -88 14 3 -94 3 1 -101 0 0 -110 0 0 -110
-94** 8 7 -93 1 0 -93 14 3 -96 3 1 -103 0 0 -110
-96** 1 0 -93 8 7 -95 14 3 -99 3 1 -106 0 0 -110
-96** -1 0 -91 8 7 -95 14 3 -99 3 1 -104 0 0 -110-98** 1 0 -92 14 3 -98 8 7 -99 3 1 -107 0 0 -110
-101** 8 7 -97 1 0 -97 14 3 -102 3 1 -107 0 0 -110
-101HOCMD 8 7 -96 1 0 -99 14 3 -103 3 1 -108 0 0 -110
0 0 -1100 0 -1100 0 -110
0 0 -110
0 0 -1100 0 -110
0 0 -1100 0 -1100 0 -110
0 0 -1100 0 -1100 0 -110
0 0 -110
0 0 -110
0 0 -1100 0 -1100 0 -110
0 0 -110
HO Cause
A_PBGT_HO
GRADE EVALUATION
Priority(0,n)
HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)
RX_LEV_MIN(n)
LINK_FACTOR(0,n)
LoadFactor(n)
DL Level
6
0 for all neighbor cell
0
-100
0 for all neighbor cell
0
Time allowed:
15 minutes
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 183/331
© Alcatel 183
183@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved ©2004, Alcatel
2.6 Handover Candidate Cell EvaluationTraining exercise (2/2)
> Emergency HO detected
1 Book-keeping list
Book-keeping list(14;3) (1;0) (8;7) (3;1)
2 Averaging measurement
Averaged measurements and PBGT(n)AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
(14;3)
(1;0)
(8;7)
(3;1)
-100
-95
-96
-106
PBGT(n)
-2
3
2
-8
3 PBGT Filtering
PBGT(n)
(1;0)
(8;7)
3
2
PBGT Filtering
4 GRADE evaluation process
GRADE(n)
(1;0)
(8;7)
3
2
GRADE evaluation process
5 Target Cell
(1;0)
? ?
?
?
?
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 184/331
© Alcatel 184
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2 ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED
PARAMETERS
2.7 Exercise
Theoretical presentation
Radio measurements principles
Radio measurements data processing
Radio Link Supervision and Power control
Handover Detection
Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation
Handover Management
Exercise
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 185/331
© Alcatel 185
185@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
2.8 Exercise
> List all the parameters involved in the detection of
cause 23
> List all the causes impacted by the parameterDELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN
> List all the causes impacted by the parameterL_RXQUAL_UL_H
> List all the causes impacted by the parameterBS_TXPWR_MAX
> List all the causes impacted by the parameter
BS_P_CON_ACKTime allowed:
10 minutes
_ _ _
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
BS_TXPWR_MAX
_ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 186/331
© Alcatel 186
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 187/331
© Alcatel 187
187@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMSSession presentation
> Objective: to be able to describe LCS, SDCCH Dynamic
allocation, TCH resource allocation, MS reselection algorithmsand list the associated parameters
> Program:
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
S1: TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
S2: ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS
S3: OTHER ALGORITHMS
S4: ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
S5: CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 188/331
© Alcatel 188
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 189/331
© Alcatel 189
189@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationPurpose
> SDCCH/8 time slots can be dynamically allocated on demand
on a cell-by-cell basis.
– “Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots”.
– “Static SDCCH time slots”
Min
Max
Static SDCCHtimeslots
AllocatedDynamic SDCCH/8
timeslots
0
TCH Capacity
> Definitions
A Static SDCCH timeslot is a physical timeslot fixed allocated on the air interface. It contains 3, 4, 7 or 8 SDCCH sub-channelsdepending on whether the timeslot is an SDCCH/3, SDCCH/4, SDCCH/7, or SDCCH/8 timeslot.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 190/331
© Alcatel 190
190@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationPrinciple (1/2)
> Principles
– Too few SDCCH time slots could result in high blocking rate onSDCCH (Configuration 1)
– Too many SDCCH time slots could lead to a lack of TCHresources (Configuration 2)
SDCCHtime slots
T C H C APA C I T Y
SDCCHtime slots
TCH CapacityTCH Capacity
Configuration 1 Configuration 2
Low signaling capacity
More TCH capacity
High signaling capacity
Less TCH capacity
> Definition
An SDCCH is a logical SDCCH sub-channel mapped on a Static SDCCH timeslot or a Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot.
> Signaling load cases
Timeslot split between signaling and traffic channels depends on the network signaling load. The main cases are:
- Normal signaling load cells:
Rural area cells in center of Location Areas
(e.g. 1 SDCCH timeslot for a 3-TRX cell)
- High signaling load cells:
Urban or suburban area cells in the center of a Location Area
Rural area cells at the border of Location Areas
(e.g. 2 SDCCH time slots for a 3-TRX cell)
- Very high signaling load cells:
Urban or suburban area cells at the border of a Location Area
Cells with high SMS load (more than one SMS per call)(e.g. 3 SDCCH time slots for a 3-TRX cell)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 191/331
© Alcatel 191
191@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationPrinciple (2/2)
> Allocation and de-allocation of Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots
• An additional dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is allocated by theBSC if there is no SDCCH sub-channel free in the cell.
• A dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is de-allocated by the BSC after
T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD (10s) delay if all of its SDCCH sub-channels become free
BCC SDC TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCHCell
Allocation ofDynamic SDCCH/8
times slots
BCC SDC
SDD TCH
TCH TCH
BCC SDC
SDD TCH
SDD TCH
BCCSDCSDD
: BCCH: Static SDCCH: Dynamic SDCCH
> The location of the Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots are fixed by O&M configuration.
>
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 192/331
© Alcatel 192
192@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationTIMESLOT types
> NEW TIMESLOT TYPES :
– SDCCH
Pure SDCCH or “ static SDCCH “
– TCH
Pure TCH
– TCH/SDCCH
“ dynamic SDCCH”
– TCH/SPDCH
– MPDCH
>The OMC-R provides the BSC with the following O&M type of radio timeslots:
• Main BCCH timeslot (BCC): It is a timeslot carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH.
• Main combined BCCH timeslot (CBC): It is a timeslot carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 +
SACCH/4.• Static SDCCH timeslot (SDC): It is a timeslot carrying SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8.
• Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (SDD): It is a timeslot carrying TCH + SACCH or SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8
• TCH timeslot (TCH): It is a timeslot carrying TCH + SACCH or PDCH
>In RAM point of view, a radio timeslot can be defined as:
• Pure BCCH timeslot : The BCCH timeslot is the radio timeslot configured as BCC by O&M. Such a timeslot onlycarries common CS signalling.
• Pure SDCCH timeslot : A pure SDCCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as a CBC or SDC by O&M. Such atimeslot can carry SDCCH traffic.
• Pure TCH timeslot : A pure TCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot only carriesTCH traffic.
• TCH/SDCCH timeslot : A TCH/SDCCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as SDD by O&M. Such a timeslot isdynamically allocated as TCH or as SDCCH depending on the usage of the timeslot. It can carry TCH traffic orSDCCH traffic.
• TCH/SPDCH timeslot : A TCH/SPDCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot isdynamically allocated as TCH or as SPDCH depending on the usage of the timeslot. It can carry TCH traffic or PStraffic.
• MPDCH timeslot : A MPDCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot can only carrycommon PS signalling.
>A pure SDCCH timeslot can carry x SDCCH sub-channels where x equal to:
− 4 in case of combined CCCH and when CBCH is not configured on the timeslot,
− 7 in case of non-combined CCCH and when CBCH is configured on the timeslot,
− 3 in case of combined CCCH and when CBCH is configured on the timeslot,
− 8 for a normal SDCCH timeslot.
>When allocated as SDCCH, a TCH/SDCCH timeslot can carry up to 8 SDCCH sub-channels.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 193/331
© Alcatel 193
193@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationAllocation algorithm
SDCCH Request
SDCCH mapped on "TCU very high load state" removal
Are they any free SDCCH sub-channel among Static SDCCH timeslots?
Selection of oneSDCCH sub-channel
Yes No
Are they any free SDCCH sub-channel among Dynamic SDCCH/8 already allocated?
Selection oneSDCCH sub-channel
Yes
Are they any Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslots available and free in the cell?
No
Allocate one DynamicSDCCH/8 timeslot
Yes No
SDCCH Requestrejected!!!
Principle 1 : Preference is given to pure SDCCH timeslots
Principle 2 : Balance TCU processor load between different TCUs
in fact before entering in this algorithm ( see slide) the first step is :
Removal of all the SDCCH subchannels mapped on TCU in « Very High Overload » state
Principle 3 : FR TRX preference
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 194/331
© Alcatel 194
194@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationSDCCH sub-channel selection
Pure SDCCH timeslots
TS with Maximum Free SDCCH sub-channels
TS with lowest TCU load
TS on FR TRX
TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_ID
TCH/SDCCH TS allocated as SDCCH
TCH/SDCCH allocated as TCH
Pure SDCCH timeslots TS with lowest TCU loadPure SDCCH timeslots
TS with Maximum Free SDCCH sub-channels
Pure SDCCH timeslots
TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_IDTS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_IDTCH/SDCCH allocated as TCH
TS on FR TRX
TCH/SDCCH TS allocated as SDCCH
TS with Maximum Free SDCCH sub-channels
TCH/SDCCH allocated as TCH TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_ID
TCH/SDCCH TS allocated as SDCCH
TS with lowest TCU load
TCH/SDCCH allocated as TCH
Note that a SDCCH request can not access the timeslots reserved by NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO. If all remainingTCH/SDCCH timeslots are reserved by NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO, then the SDCCH request shall be rejected.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 195/331
© Alcatel 195
195@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationDe allocation algorithm
> CASE 1:
> IF all SDCCH sub-channels of a TCH/SDCCH timeslot become back freeTHEN the T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD timer (10s, not tunable) is started.
> IF the timeslot is still free of SDCCH sub-channel when the timer expiresTHEN it is de-allocated (it becomes back TCH).
> CASE 2:
> IF several TCH/SDCCH timeslots are allocated as SDCCHAND IF all of them become free of SDCCH sub-channels when thetimer runs
> THEN all these timeslots except one are de-allocated (become backTCH) without awaiting the timer expiration.(the last one waiting for the timer expiration)
The de-allocation algorithm ensures that :
· TCH/SDCCH timeslots are not allocated too fast to TCH after de-allocating them
TCH/SDCCH timeslots are not re-allocated too frequently to SDCCH
Note : · while T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is running:
the dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot marked as “HOLD” is still considered as allocated to SDCCH (and can not be allocatedto TCH);
If a subsequent dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (used as SDCCH and in the same cell) becomes free:
a) If this just freed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot has a higher priority, T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is re-started and precedentdynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot in “HOLD” state is de-allocated immediately;
b) If this just freed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot has lower priority, and T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is re-started and the justfreed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is de-allocated immediately.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 196/331
© Alcatel 196
196@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationO&M configuration 1/2
> Massive modification byscript
• 10 templates
• Templatecustomization
• Template launchedthrough PRC
> Selection of static or dynamicSDCCH
• Timeslot configuration menu
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
2
4
7
3
1
10
9
6
12
8
5
11
>Dynamic sdcch rules
>The CBCH must be configured on a static SDCCH/8 or SDCCH/4 timeslot.
>Combined SDCCHs (SDCCH/4 + BCCH) are always static.
>To avoid incoherent allocation strategy between SDCCH and PDCH, a dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot cannot have thecharacteristic of being a PDCH (it cannot carry GPRS traffic).
>The operator must configure at least one static SDCCH/8 or SDCCH/4 timeslot on BCCH TRX in a cell.
>In cells with E-GSM, only the TRX, which do not belong to the G1 band, can support dynamic and static SDCCHs.
>In multiband and concentric cells, only the TRX, which belongs to the outer zone, can support dynamic and static SDCCHs.
>Up to 24 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels can be configured per TRX.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 197/331
© Alcatel 197
197@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocationO&M configuration 2/2
> Default configuration for a cell which has only Full rate TRX
Number of TRXin the cell
Number ofStatic SDCCH
Number ofDynamic SDCCH
Total numberof SDCCH
MaximumSDCCH/TRXratio
Is BCCH/CCCHcombined withSDCCH?
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1112
13
14
15
16
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
1616
16
24
24
24
8
8
16
16
24
24
24
24
24
32
32
3240
40
40
48
48
12
12
24
24
32
32
32
40
40
48
48
4856
56
64
72
72
12.0 (note 1)
6.0
12.0
8.0
8.0
6.4
5.3
5.7
5.0
5.3
4.8
4.44.7
4.3
4.6
4.8
4.5
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
NoNo
No
No
No
No
Note1: For one TRX, dynamic SDCCHs are over-dimensioned because of the granularity of 8. According to theAlcatel traffic model, all dynamic SDCCHs will not be used.
Note2: An additional dynamic SDCCH/8 must be provided for each DR TRX (these are expected mainly on smallcells).
> rules:
• At least one static SDCCH/4 or SDCCH/8 on BCCH TRX
– Up to 24 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per TRX
– Up to 32 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per TCU
– Up to 88 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per CELL
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 198/331
© Alcatel 198
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 199/331
© Alcatel 199
199@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmRadio Allocation and Management
> Radio resource allocation and management (RAM) aims at:
• Managing pools of TCH radio resources by: – defining TCH radio timeslots as a function of the cell radio
configuration from the operator
– sorting these TCH TS according to their radio capabilities(FR or DR, frequency band (G1 or GSM/DCS))
• Allocating dedicated TCH radio resources by:
– selecting the TCH pool in which the TCH should be chosenaccording to:
– the requested channel rate (FR or HR)
– the radio capability of the mobile
– the TRE DR capability and the TRE band
– selecting the best TCH resource among the available TCHchannels of this pool according to several criteria
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 200/331
© Alcatel 200
200@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmRadio Timeslot of a cell : Operator view
> On the OMC-R the operator can configure the following Radio TS per
cell:
• Main BCCH timeslot (BCC): TS carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH+ CCCH
• Main combined BCCH timeslot (CBC): TS carrying FCCH + SCH+ BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 + SACCH/4
• Static SDCCH timeslot (SDC): TS carrying SDCCH/8 +SACCH/8
• Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (SDD): TS carrying TCH + SACCHor SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8
• TCH timeslot (TCH): TS carrying TCH + SACCH or used as a PS
timeslot (PDCH)
> The operator has to choose between a Combined BCCH (CBC TS) or a Non-combined BCCH configuration (BCC TS).
> A PDCH is a radio timeslot used for PS traffic or signalling.
> It can carry either PS traffic or PS signalling but not both.
• If it carries traffic it is called a Slave PDCH (SPDCH) TS and it carries the logical channels PDTCH+PACCH+PTTCH.
• If it carries signalling it is called a Master PDCH (MPDCH) TS and it carries:
– either the logical channels PBCCH+PPCH+PAGCH+PRACH: it is then called a Primary MPDCH
– or only PPCH+PAGCH+PRACH: it is then called a Secondary MPDCH
> SDD TS can carry either TCH or SDCCH channels but not both at the same time.
> TCH TS can carry either CS traffic channel TCH or PS logical channels but not both at the same time.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 201/331
© Alcatel 201
201@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmRadio Timeslot of a cell : RAM view
> In the BSS the RAM software module maps the OMC-R cell radio
configuration to its own types of TS :
• Pure BCCH timeslot : BCC TS carrying only common CSsignalling (BCCH+CCCH)
• Pure SDCCH timeslot : CBC or SDC TS carrying only dedicatedCS signalling (SDCCH)
• Pure TCH timeslot : TCH TS carrying only TCH traffic
• TCH/SDCCH timeslot : SDD TS carrying either CS traffic (TCH) ordedicated CS signalling (SDCCH)
• TCH/SPDCH timeslot : TCH TS carrying either CS traffic (TCH) orPS traffic (SPDCH channels)
• MPDCH timeslot : TCH TS carrying common PS signalling(PBCCH+PCCCH or PCCCH only)
> TCH/SDCCH timeslots are allocated as TCH or SDCCH according to an SDCCH dynamic allocation algorithm presented in the“Introduction to Radio Fine Tuning B8” training course.
> TCH/SPDCH timeslots are allocated as TCH or SPDCH according to a SPDCH dynamic allocation algorithm presented in the“Introduction to GPRS & E-GPRS Quality of Service Monitoring B8” training course.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 202/331
© Alcatel 202
202@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmRadio Timeslot : OMC-R / RAM mapping
> NB_TS_MPCH MPDCH TS are defined on the BCCH TRX :
• on the timeslots configured as TCH TS on the OMC-R
• having the lowest timeslot index
> TCH/SPDCH TS are defined as being part of an SPDCH group
> Pure TCH timeslots are OMC-R TCH TS neither defined as MPDCH TSnor in an SPDCH group
TCH
Pure BCCH
Pure SDCCH
TCH/SDCCH
TCH/SPDCH
MPDCH
Pure TCH
BCC
CBC
TCHSDC
SDD
TCH
OMC-Rradio TS
RAMradio TS
> MPDCH TS are defined on the BCCH TRX even if the corresponding TRX_PREF_MARK is different than 0.
B_TS_MPCH
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 203/331
© Alcatel 203
203@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmDefinition of a TCH/SPDCH TS
> For PS traffic resource allocation, an SPDCH group is defined on a perTRX basis and is made of consecutive timeslots:
• mapped on OMC-R TCH TS
• located on a PS capable TRX (TRX_PREF_MARK = 0)
• not defined as MPDCH TS
• having the same radio configuration (MA, MAIO)
> If several SPDCH groups can be defined on a given TRX, the BSSchooses the SPDCH group of timeslots having the highest number of
consecutive timeslots.
> A radio timeslot belonging to one of the different SPDCH groups of thecell is identified in RAM as a TCH/SPDCH timeslot.
> The timeslots shall be consecutive on a given TRX means that there shall be no hole in the SPDCH group.
> If several SPDCH groups can be defined on the same TRX and having the same number of consecutive timeslots then the groupthat is located on the left side of the TRX (i.e. the timeslots having the lowest index) shall be chosen.
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 204/331
© Alcatel 204
204@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmExercise 1
> A non hopping cell is configured on the OMC-R
> Find the radio TS configuration in RAM if NB_TS_MPDCH= 2
TRX1
TRX2
TRX3
TRX4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MPDPBCPSDPTCTSDTSP
: MPDCH: Pure BCCH: Pure SDCCH: Pure TCH: TCH/SDCCH: TCH/SPDCH
BCC TCH SDC TCH
SDD TCH SDC TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH
TRX1
TRX2
TRX3
TRX4
TRX_PREF_MARK
0
0
0
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
> The timeslots shall be consecutive on a given TRX means that there shall be no hole in the SPDCH group.
> If several SPDCH groups can be defined on the same TRX and having the same number of consecutive timeslots then the groupthat is located on the left side of the TRX (i.e. the timeslots having the lowest index) shall be chosen.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 205/331
© Alcatel 205
205@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH pools
> 3 pools of TCH resources are managed per cell:
• G1 pure TCH pool : contains all the free TCH sub-channels (FR orHR) free on the pure TCH TS of the G1 TRXs
• GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool : contains all the freeTCH sub-channels (FR or HR) free on the pure TCH TS and on theTCH/SPDCH TS of the GSM/DCS TRXs
• GSM/DCS TCH/SDCCH pool : contains all the free TCH sub-channels (FR or HR) free on the TCH/SDCCH TS of the GSM/DCSTRXs
> Any pure TCH, TCH/SPDCH, TCH/SDCCH TS can be:
• Busy : if it is not free to serve a FR TCH request
• Free : if it is free to serve a FR TCH request
> A DR TS (timeslot on a DR TRX) is free if no FR TCH or HR TCH is allocated for a call on this timeslot.
> A DR TS is busy if at least one TCH is allocated for a call on this timeslot:
• 1 FR TCH
• or 1 HR TCH (HR 0 TCH or HR 1 TCH)
• or 2 HR TCHs (HR 0 TCH and HR 1 TCH)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 206/331
© Alcatel 206
206@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH sub-pools
> FR TCH channels can be allocated on both FR and DR TRXs whereasHR TCH channels can only be allocated on DR TRXs
> Each of the three TCH pools is divided in three sub-pools:
• FR sub-pool : contains all the free FR TCH sub-channels availableon the FR TRX
• DR: sub-pool : contains all the free FR TCH sub-channels availableon the DR TRX
• HR sub-pool : contains all the free HR TCH sub-channels whosemate HR TCH sub-channel is busy(always located on the DR TRX)
> Inputs for TCH allocation function:
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 207/331
© Alcatel 207
207@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH allocation process 1/2
TCH Request
TCH Allocation
- Radio capability of the mobile- Channel type (FR, HR, DR)- Speech version (FR, HR, EFR, AMR FR, AMR HR)- Request type (NA or HO)
- Cell channel type capability- Cell codec type capability- Cell load
TCH selected
TCH free?
Yes
Queuing?
Select a TCH sub-pool
Select a TCH in this sub-pool
TCH rejectedTCH queued
Yes No
No
Inputs for TCH allocation function:
> radio capability of the MS:
• the BSS knows the radio capability of the mobile from the MS CLASSMARK after the Radio Link Establishment procedure
> requirements from the MSC:
channel type (mandatory) is one of the following:
list of preferred speech version (optional):
– GSM full rate speech version 1 = FR
– GSM full rate speech version 2 = EFR
– GSM full rate speech version 3 = AMR FR
– GSM half rate speech version 1 = HR
– GSM half rate speech version 3 = AMR HR
> capabilities of the cell:
• FR TCHs only if only FR TRXs / FR+HR TCHs if some DR TRXs
• codec supported among: FR, EFR, AMR FR, HR, AMR HR
FR Full Rate only
HR Half Rate only
DR FR P NCA Dual Rate Full Rate Preferred No Changes Allowed af ter f irst channel a llocationas a result of the request
DR FR P CA Dual Rate Full Rate Preferred Changes Allowed after f irst channel al location as a
result of the requ est
DR HR P NCA Dual Rate Hal f Rate Preferred No Changes Allowed af ter f irst channel a llocationas a result of the request
DR HR P CA Dua l Ra te Hal f Ra te Prefer red Changes A llowed a fter f ir st channel a ll oca tion as aresult of the requ est
DR SV P NCA Dual Rate No Changes of channel ra te Al lowed after f irst channel al location as aresult of the requ est
DR SV P CA Dua l Ra te Changes o f channel ra te Al lowed a fter fi rst channel al loca tion as aresult of the requ est
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 208/331
© Alcatel 208
208@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH allocation process 2/2
TCH Allocation
TCH free?
Queuing?
TCH selected
Select a TCH sub-pool
Select a TCH in this sub-pool
TCH rejectedTCH queued
Yes No
Yes No
ALLOC_ANYWAYT11T11_FORCEDT_QHO
NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO
- The timer T11 corresponds to normal assignment with queuing authorised.
- The timer T11_FORCED corresponds to normal assignment
i) when the queuing is not authorised by the MSC but forced by the BSC (QUEUE_ANYWAY = TRUE),
or ii) when the queuing is not authorised but the request has its pre-emption indicator set and has alreadyforced the release of a lower priority pre-emptable on-going call.
The QUEUE_ANYWAY flag is checked by the Normal Assignment (NASS) entity.
- The timer T_qho corresponds to an external channel change with queuing authorised or to an externalchannel change when the queuing is not authorised but the request has its pre-emption indicator set andhas already forced the release of a lower priority pre-emptable on-going call.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 209/331
© Alcatel 209
209@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH sub-pool selection
> The BSS selects the TCH sub-pools in which a TCH channel can be
allocated according to:• The requested channel rate and the cell load situation
– favour HR if cell is loaded
• A priority given to generic resources
1. G1 pool (E-GSM mobile only)
2. GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool
3. GSM/DCS TCH/SDCCH pool
• An optimisation of FR/HR resources
– favour FR pool over DR pool for a FR TCH request
– favour HR pool over DR pool for an HR TCH request
• The availability of a TCH channel in the sub-pool
> TCH allocation without list of preferred speech versions
• FR request: FR pool DR pool
• HR request: HR pool DR pool
• DR FR Preferred request:
– cell load=False: FR pool DR pool HR pool
– cell load=True: HR pool DR pool FR pool
• DR HR Pref. request: HR pool DR pool FR pool
> TCH allocation with a list of preferred speech versions
• FR SV then HR SV: FR pool DR pool HR
• HR SV then FR SV: HR pool DR pool FR
• FR SV only: FR pool DR pool
• HR SV only: HR pool DR pool
> favour G1 pool for an E-GSM mobile (penetration of E-GSM mobile is low and GSM/DCS traffic is high)
> disfavour TCH allocation on TCH/SDCCH TS (favour signalling over traffic)
> Example : E-GSM mobile / DR FR P NCA / no sub-pool is empty
– BSS selects a TCH in the G1 pure TCH pool / FR sub-pool
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 210/331
© Alcatel 210
210@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH selection
> Sub-pool of the GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool
• Optimise CS/PS traffic resources1. Favour TCH allocation on pure TCH TS
2. Optimise PS traffic on TCH/SPDCH TS
– TCH allocated on TRX of highest TRX rank
» and on TS of highest TS index
– SPDCH allocated on TRX of lowest TRX rank
» and on TS of lowest TS index
> 2 modes of TCH selection
• On pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots
• On TCH/SPDCH timeslots
> TCH selection on pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots if:
• there is at least one candidate TCH free on pure TCH TS
OR
• there is no candidate TCH free on TCH/SPDCH TS
– only the candidate TCH sub-channels available on pure TCH TS and on TCH/SDCCH TS are kept as candidate
> TCH selection on TCH/SPDCH timeslots if:
• there is at least one candidate TCH free on a TCH/SPDCH TS
AND
• there is no candidate TCH free on pure TCH TS
– only the candidate TCH sub-channels available on TCH/SPDCH TS are kept as candidate
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 211/331
© Alcatel 211
211@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH selection on pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH TS
> The TCH is chosen from the selected sub-pool according to the
following criteria:
Non hopping cellBiggest Mobile AllocationEN_MA_SELECTION = true
TCH selected
Highest TS index
HR 0 TCH sub-channel
TCH candidates of the selectedTCH sub-pool
Highest TRX_PREF_MARK
FR allocation orHR allocation on busy TS
Best Interference Band
Highest TRX identity
> The BSS attempts to offer the best quality of service for TCH calls in accordance with the privileged order between the groups ofTRXs (if any) defined by the operator. Among a group of TRXs the BSS attempts to allocate traffic channels that have the bestquality characteristics (channels using frequency with low reuse factor, large hopping frequency sets, low measured interference).
> The benefits from this type of allocation are that the operator has the possibility to define groups of TRXs and to favour (or todisadvantage) them on the other if he wants to do so. Among a group of pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots, the overallinterference is kept as low as possible, thus the user will perceive a better quality of service.
> The BSS chooses the best TCH among the sub-channels of the selected TCH sub-pool applying criteria below in the specifiedorder of priority:
1. TCH on TS with the highest TRX Preference Mark
– According to the frequency plan, the coverage and interference probability of a cell (or according tomeasurements), the operator may know which TRX should be a priori favored for TCH selection. For that purpose,it is possible for operators to give a preference mark to each TRX of a cell. This mark is given through theparameters TRX_PREF_MARK (TPM) changeable at OMC-R side per TRX. The range of TRX_PREF_MARK willbe from 0 (lowest priority) to 7 (highest priority).The TCH selection function favours the channels with the highest TPM.
– Note that a few Pure TCH TS should be available in a cell on a TRX of TRX_PREF_MARK value of 0 since
TCH/SPDCH TS may also be defined on this TRX according to PS radio resource configuration.2. TCH on TS with the biggest Mobile Allocation (for hopping cell only)
– Considering that the number of frequencies is a key factor for the average quality of channels, the TCH selectionfunction favors the TS with the biggest MA (i.e. with the most frequencies in their frequency hopping sequence).This selection criterion is enabled/disabled via the f lag EN_MA_SELECTION changeable at the OMC-R side on aper cell basis.
3. TCH on TS from the best Interference Band
– Considering that the uplink received level measured by the BTS on an idle channel is a means to assess thequality when in connected mode, the TCH selection function favours the TS belonging to the best InterferenceBand (IB). Five IBs are defined through 5 parameters INTFBD1 to INTFBD5 where INTFBD(i)< INTFBD(i+1) andINTFBD5 = -47 all changeable at the OMC-R side on a per BTS basis.
4. TCH on TRX with the highest TRX identity
5. TCH on TS with the highest TS index
6. HR 0 TCH if the two sub-channels remaining candidates are the 2 HR TCH of the same free TS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 212/331
© Alcatel 212
212@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithmTCH selection on TCH/SPDCH TS
> The TCH is chosen from the selected sub-pool according to the
following criteria:
• TRX rank is determined by the TRX Ranking algorithm describedin the “GPRS & EGPRS Radio Algorithms Description” trainingcourse
TCH selected
Highest TS index
HR 0 TCH sub-channelFR allocation or
HR allocation on busy TS
Highest TRX identity
TCH candidates of the selectedTCH sub-pool
> The BSS tends to allocate to the MFS the TCH/SPDCH timeslots so as to avoid conflicts between CS and PS allocations on PScapable TRX.
> In order to be able to allocate as much slave PDCHs as possible to a given TBF, it is important to avoid any mix of allocation
between TCHs and SPDCHs (e.g. avoid on a TRX a configuration such as TCH – TCH – SPDCH – SPDCH – TCH – SPDCH – SPDCH – SPDCH). For that purpose, a TRX rank is assigned to each PS capable TRX. The TRX having the highest TRX rank ispreferentially selected for TCH allocations, whereas TRX having the lowest TRX rank is preferentially selected for SPDCHallocations
> This rule only applies on PS capable TRX. On a given PS capable TRX, TCH are preferentially allocated on the right side of theTRX (highest TS index), whereas SPDCH are preferentially allocated on the left side (lowest TS index).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 213/331
© Alcatel 213
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 214/331
© Alcatel 214
214@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> At startup (IMSI Attach), the MS is selecting a cell with
• best C1• once “camped on” one cell (in idle mode)…
> …the MS can decide to reselect on another one if:
• C1 criteria is too low
• the MS cannot decode downlink messages
• the current cell is becoming forbidden (e.g. barred)
• the MS cannot access the cell
• there is a better cell, regarding C2 criteria
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsSelection and reselection principles
> Idle mode• Status null:
the mobile station (MS) is off
• Status search BCCH:the MS searches a broadcast channel with the best signal level (cell selection and reselection)
– BCCH list: up to 36 BCCH frequencies plus BSIC can be saved on SIM per visited network.
– Look if frequencies of the BCCH list can be used.
– No entries in the BCCH list, or the location is completely different: scan frequency band.
• Status BCCH:the MS is synchronized on a BCCH. The MS camps on a cell.
– The BTS sends the neighbor cells list (BCCH allocation BA) on BCCH in System Information (SI) 2, 2bis and 2ter ifBSS parameter EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH in dual band networks:
– GSM900 serving cell» GSM900 neighbor cells put into SI 2
» GSM1800 neighbor cells put into SI 2ter/2bis
– GSM1800 serving cell
» GSM900 neighbor cells put into SI 2ter
» GSM1800 neighbor cells put into SI 2/2bis
– The MS measures RXLEV from BCCH of the serving and neighbor cells.
– Camping on a cell is performed using C1 criteria only (the chosen cell is the one with the best C1)
– The MS needs to have access to the network.
– The MS needs to be accessible by the network.
– Reselection is done using the mechanisms referenced above
– ‘handover algorithms’ in idle mode
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 215/331
© Alcatel 215
215@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> C1
• ensure that, if a call was attempted, it would be done with asufficient downlink and uplink received level
• based on 2 parameters, broadcast on BCCH
– RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN [dBm]
– minimum level to access the cell
– MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH [dBm]
– maximum level for MS emitting
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsC1 criteria (1/2)
_ _
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 216/331
© Alcatel 216
216@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> C1
• evaluated every 5 sec (minimum)• C1 = A - MAX(0,B) > 0
• A = RxLev - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
– assess that the MS received level is sufficient
• B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - P
– P maximum power of MS
– assess that the BTS received level will be sufficient
– if MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH < P
• If A > 0 & B < 0 OK, if B > 0, it can be compensated by A
– A >> 0 means that the MS is closer to the BTS
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsC1 criteria (2/2)
_ _
_ _ _
S_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 217/331
© Alcatel 217
217@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> C2
• CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND= not present THEN C2=C1 else
– C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T)(if PENALTY_TIME ≠ 31)
– if T > PENALTY_TIME, TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T) = 0
– used to avoid locating on “transient cell”
– CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to favor cell among other(e.g. micro-cell vs. umbrella, once T > PENALTY_TIME)
– Or C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(if PENALTY_TIME = 31)
– CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to handicap some cells amongothers
• One reselection criterion is compared to C2s
– C2neighbor > C2current if cells belong to same LA
– C2neighbor > C2current+Cell_Reselect_Hysteresis if cells from adifferent LA
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsC2 criteria
> Note:
• CRO: from 0 to 126 dB, step 2dB
• PENALTY_TIME: from 0=20s to 30=620s, step: 20s; 31=infinite
• TEMPORARY_OFFSET: from 1=10dB to 6=60dB; 7 = infinite
> The use of a second formula (Penalty_time = 31) is restricted to very special cases, as we do not like to penalize a cell. If a cell isparametered with PT=31, it will be penalized compared to ALL its neighbors. To penalize a cell compared to one neighbor, oneshould better boost the neighbor cell (using the first formula).
> The first formula is very useful for favoring indoor cell or microcell.
> Cell selection and cell reselection considering CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
• in case of phase 2 MS and CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND=1, it is possible to set priorities to cells• CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
– Two values:
– 0 = normal priority (default value)
– 1 = lower priority
– Interacts with CELL_BAR_ACCESS (barring cell)
• A phase 2 MS selects the suitable cell with the highest C2 (C1>0) belonging to the list of normal priority.
• If no cell with normal priority is available then the MS would select the lower priority cell with the highest C2 (C1>0).
CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - EMPORARY_OFFSET(T)
PENALTY_TIME ≠
_ _
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSETPENALTY_TIME
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSETPENALTY_TIME
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
e _ ese ect_ ysteres s
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 218/331
© Alcatel 218
218@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsTraining Exercise (1/2)
> On this network example
• List the parameters involved in the selection /reselection process
Time allowed:
5 minutes Cell
S e ct or ized c e l l
CI=6169GSM900
C o ncentr ic c e l l
( 8 5 64, 196 4 )
( 8 5 64, 616 9 )
( 8 5 57, 18 2 3 )
Cell
CI=6271GSM900
CI=6270, GSM900
CI=1823GSM900
CI=1964GSM900
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 219/331
© Alcatel 219
219@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.3 MS Reselection algorithmsTraining Exercise (2/2)
Cell 1
Cell 2
CI=6169GSM900
Cell 3
( 8 5 64, 196 4 )
( 8 5 64, 616 9 )
( 8 5 57, 18 2 3 )
Cell
CI=6271GSM900
CI=6270, GSM900
CI=1823GSM900
CI=1964GSM900
• Find the selected cell by the MSMeasurements RxLev (cell 1) RxLev (cell 2) RxLev (cell 3)
1
2
3
4
5
-80
-84
-88
-88
-89
-96
-90
-90
-87
-85
-104
-100
-87
-82
-78
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 220/331
© Alcatel 220
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3 OTHER ALGORITHMS
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
B9
3.1 Dynamic SDCCH allocation
3.2 TCH resource allocation algorithm
3.3 MS Reselection algorithms
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 221/331
© Alcatel 221
221@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> From B7, the 3G to 2G Handovers are managed as incoming HO inBSS but :
• What was the weakness ?
• How to improve it ?
• What do we have to compute ?
• What is necessary to implement ?
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmPurpose
B9
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 222/331
© Alcatel 222
222@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> In case of 2G cell overloaded we had no way to reject the 3G HO, so2G cells can be congested because 3G network is under lack ofcoverage.
> We must have the possibility to reject 3G incoming HOs in case of 2Gtarget cell is loaded.
> We have first to compute periodically the load of our 2G cells.
> Then, to compare it with a specific parameter we have to create in
order to decide the need of rejection.
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmProblem and solution
B9
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 223/331
© Alcatel 223
223@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> The traffic load computation is the long term one, already used for HOcauses 12 and 23.
> The result is compared with THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT in orderto evaluate “3G_HOReject_Load State”
• IF the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD ≥THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
– THEN 3G_HOReject_Load State = HIGH
• ELSE IF the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD <
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT – THEN 3G_HOReject_Load State = LOW
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmalgorithms and parameters involved (Evaluation) 1/3
B9
Example:
IF
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 6A_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 4
As TCH_INFO_PERIOD is fixed to 5s
The Traffic evaluation AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD is revalued every 20 s ( 4 X 5s = 20s )
The Long Term decision is taken after N_TRAFFIC_LOAD times in the same state ( 2 mn in this example)
Time
AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
3G_HOReject_Load_State
Time
Time
HIGH
LOW
6 High6 Low
6 High
T C H_
I N F O_
P E R I O D
X A_
T R A F F I C_
L O A D
2 mn
_ _ _ _
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
_ _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 224/331
© Alcatel 224
224@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> IF the 3G to 2G handover is triggered by cause different from
an emergency cause – THEN IF 3G_HOReject_Load State = High
– Then the BSC shall enter the Hand over FailureSignalling procedure
– ElSE IF 3G_HOReject_Load State = Low
– Then the BSC shall accept the incoming handover
> IF the 3G to 2G handover is triggered by emergency cause – Then the BSC shall accept the incoming handover
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmalgorithms and parameters involved (Decision) 2/3
B9
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 225/331
© Alcatel 225
225@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> In case of rejection, the BSC shall send an HO Failure message with:
• Cause indicating “no Radio resource available”
• Cell Load Information:
– Cell Capacity Class
– Cell Capacity Class = CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
– Cell Load
– Cell Load = AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD * 100(With the last computed value of AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD)
> These information will be used by the RNC and its own algorithms inorder to evaluate the necessity to retry the HO or not on the same cell.
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmalgorithms and parameters involved (Rejection) 3/3
B9
The Cell Capacity Class should follow the recommended rule:
“In order to fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacity class, ranging from 1 to
100:Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1 shall indicate the minimum capacity
class, and 100 shall indicate the maximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on a
linear scale.
The default value of Cell Capacity Class depends on the number of available TCHs in the cell and since
there may be up to 126 TCH channels in one GSM cell ( [ 8 TS X 16 TRX ] – 1 BCCH - 1 SDCCH ) :
Cell_Capacity_Class = INT ( ( 99 * ( NTCH – 1 ) / 125 ) +1 )
CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 226/331
© Alcatel 226
226@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
3.4 3G to 2G HO filtering algorithmTraining Exercise
> Which Mobiles are rejected ?
> What is the Cell_Capacity_Class for each case ?
• THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT = 75 %
Time allowed:
10 minutes
MS
1
4
3
2
5
HO Cause
COMFORT
EMERG
COMFORT
EMERG
COMFORT
FREE TCH
3
3
2
0
12
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD
60
80
75
100
85
REJECTEDCell
CapacityClass
B9
HR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 227/331
© Alcatel 227
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4 ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 228/331
© Alcatel 228
228@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4 ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIORSession presentation
> Objective: to be able to Estimate qualitatively the impact of parameterschange
> Program:
4.1 Theoretical presentation
4.2 Examples and exercises
S1: TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
S2: ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS
S3: OMC-R RADIO PARAMETERS
S4: ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
S5: CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 229/331
© Alcatel 229
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4 ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
4.1 Theoretical presentation
Theoretical presentation
Examples and Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 230/331
© Alcatel 230
230@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.1 Theoretical presentationSession objectives
> SESSION OBJECTIVES
• Be able to estimate qualitatively the impact of a parameterchange
> JUSTIFICATION
• Tuning is not an exact science
• The optimizer has to control every parameter change and predict
qualitatively what the consequences will be
• Note: Each change of parameter and its justification have to be
registered in a database for operation convenience
> DETAILED PROGRAM• Three Example/Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 231/331
© Alcatel 231
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4 ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
4.1 Examples and Exercises
Theoretical presentation
Examples and Exercises
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 232/331
© Alcatel 232
232@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesOverview
> Example 1: Optimization of handover algorithms
• Sliding averaging window
> Example 2: Optimization of power control algorithms
• Sliding averaging window
> Example 3: Traffic load sharing
• Parameters qualitative influence
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 233/331
© Alcatel 233
233@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Search for best tuning of HO parameters to decrease calldrop
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 1: Optimization of Handover Algorithms (1/4)
Call drop
HO/Call
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 234/331
© Alcatel 234
234@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Main Objective: make the HO algorithm as efficient as possible
• Minimize call drop rate – trigger HO soon enough
– toward the “best” neighbor
• while keeping a good speech quality
– avoid HO due to quality: “too late”
– avoid having HO/call rate too high
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 1: Optimization of Handover Algorithms (2/4)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 235/331
© Alcatel 235
235@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Method
• Collect Abis trace chart• Search for HO level to avoid quality
lower than 4 (or even 3)
– sufficient number of “badquality” samples
– low standard deviation
– problem when HO alreadyactivated
<R x Q u a l_ D L >= f(A V _ R x L e v_ D L )
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
N b _ s a m p l e s
0
200
400
600
S ta n d a rd D e vi a ti o n
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
<R x Q u a l _ U L> =f(A V _ R x L e v_ U L )
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
N b _ s a m pl e s
0
200
400
600
800
1000
S tan d a rd D e vi a ti o n
0
1
2
3
> Then tune according to QoS indicators (OMC-R) by repetitive process
• A_PBGT_HO/A_LEV_HO/A_QUAL_HO
• L_RXLEV_UL_H, L_RXLEV_DL_H, L_RXLEV_UL_P,L_RXLEV_DL_P
• OK as soon as HO success rate stabilized
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 1: Optimization of Handover Algorithms (3/4)
> Never forget that Abis information takes into account the traffic distribution in the cell. Any parameter tuning done after an Abisstudy has to be checked periodically as the distribution in the cell can change from one week to another.
> Use the pivot table function (Excel) to build this graph.
RxQUAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
- 1 1 0
- 1 0 8
- 1 0 6
- 1 0 4
- 1 0 2
- 1 0 0 - 9
8 - 9 6
- 9 4
- 9 2
- 9 0
- 8 8
- 8 6
- 8 4
- 8 2
- 8 0
- 7 8
- 7 6
- 7 4
- 7 2
- 7 0
- 6 8
- 6 6
- 6 4
- 6 2
- 6 0
- 5 8
- 5 6
- 5 4
- 5 2
- 5 0
- 4 8
RxQUAL
_ _ _ _ _ _
L_RXLEV_UL_H, L_RXLEV_DL_H, L_RXLEV_UL_P, _ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 236/331
© Alcatel 236
236@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Neighboring relationship cleanup
• Remove useless relationships (A interface statistics, PM Type180)
• Remove the common BCCH/BSIC couple
• Add new relationships when a new site is created
> Finally, check the main QoS indicators
• Call drop rate
• HO failure rate
• HO/call rate
• Radio Link Failure rate(the strong rate of radio link failure can denounce a lack ofvicinity relation between cells)
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 1: Optimization of Handover Algorithms (4/4)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 237/331
© Alcatel 237
237@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> According to the Abis results and some parametersalready set, tune qualitatively the sliding averaging windows:
– A_QUAL_HO
– A_LEV_HO
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 1: training exercise
Time allowed:5 minutes
Level at RxQual=3 - 80 dBm - 96 dBm - 90 dBm
L_RXLEV_DL_H
A_QUAL_HO
A_LEV_HO
- 85 dBm
6
?
- 90 dBm
6
?
- 90 dBm
?
4
A_QUAL_HO
A_LEV_HO
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 238/331
© Alcatel 238
238@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Optimization of Downlink Power Control
– Decrease of downlink interference – Risks of delay of HO (without fast power control)
> Optimization of Uplink Power Control
– Decrease of Uplink interference
– MS battery saving
– Risks of delay of HO (without fast power control)
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 2: Power Control Algorithms Optimization (1/2)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 239/331
© Alcatel 239
239@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> The main tuning problem is the interaction with handover, whichcan slow down HO decision, and debase call drop rate
• Power control threshold must be within HO ones
• Dynamic step size must be activated if possible
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 2: Power Control Algorithms Optimization (2/2)
> In the example below, a dynamic MS PC is activated. The MS power changes are really reactive and control the UL levelbetween -80 and -90dBm. In this example, the HO threshold is -98 dBm.
RxLev_UL
-100
-95
-90
-85
-80
-75
-70
1 3 9 7 7 1 15 1 53 1 91 2 29 26 7 3 0 5 3 43 3 81 4 19 4 57 4 95 5 33 5 71 6 09 6 47 6 85 7 23 7 61 7 99 8 37 8 75 9 13 9 51 9 89 10 27
RxLev_UL
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
1 4 0 7 9 1 18 1 5 7 1 9 6 2 35 2 74 3 1 3 3 5 2 3 9 1 4 30 4 69 5 08 5 47 5 86 6 25 6 64 7 03 7 42 7 8 1 8 2 0 8 59 8 98 9 37 9 76 1 01 5
MS_PwrLevel
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 240/331
© Alcatel 240
240@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Explain qualitatively the impacts of some parameter changes
– What happens if:
»we increase POW_INC_FACTOR?
»we increase MAX_POW_INC?
»We increase A_LEV_PC?
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 2: Training Exercise
Time allowed:
5 minutes
_ _
MAX_POW_INC
A_LEV_PC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 241/331
© Alcatel 241
241@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Used to unload cell with too high traffic, without HW extension
> Trade-off between traffic sharing/radio quality
> Different algorithm
– Fast Traffic Handover: Cause 28
– Traffic Handover: Cause 23 and 12 with
DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)
– Static (couple of cells): HO_MARGIN, LINK_FACTOR
– On a local traffic basis: – Load_Factor/Free_Factor
– Forced Directed Retry
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (1/12)
_ _ ,n
_ , _
oa _ actor ree_ actor
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 242/331
© Alcatel 242
242@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (2/12)
> Fast Traffic HO
• Useful in case of sudden traffic peaks as the process response isinstantaneous (no averaging window)
• The principle is to force handover towards neighbor cells whichhave lower traffic when a request is queued in the serving cell.
• Interaction with Forced DR due to the use of same thresholds
• Optimization method (repetitive process)
– Tunes L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n), FREElevel_DR(n)
– Applies new values, checks traffic peaks, QoS indicators
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n), FREElevel_DR(n
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 243/331
© Alcatel 243
243@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (3/12)
> The Pros and cons of Fast Traffic HO
• Efficiency depends on
– Traffic location in the loaded cell
– Capacity of neighbor cells
Increase of the number of HO/call
Increase of incoming HOs fail rate (risk of ping-pong effect)
– In case of internal HO: use PING_PONG_HCP with T_HCP
or/and enable HO CAUSE 23
Heavy to tune (has to be done for each couple of cells)
Adapted to instantaneous traffic modification
Can be used to send traffic towards a cell external to the servingBSC
Adapted to hierarchical network, but also to standard ones
PING_PONG_HCP _HCP
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 244/331
© Alcatel 244
244@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0,n)
> CHANGE DYNAMICALLY TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION WITH HO:
• Traffic HO Cause 23
– Ease outgoing better condition HO on a traffic point of view
• Slow down outgoing better cell HO (to be tuned for a given coupleof cells)
– When the better cell in radio condition is the worst cell intraffic terms
• Optimization method (repetitive process) – Tune DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN and
DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN
– Apply new values, check traffic, QoS indicators and possiblyspeech quality
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (4/12)
DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGINDELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 245/331
© Alcatel 245
245@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (5/12)
> The Pros and cons of DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0,n) method
• Efficiency depends on
– Traffic location in the loaded cell
– Cells overlap
– Capacity of neighbor cells
Increase the number of HO/call
Cannot be used to send traffic toward a cell external to the servingBSC
The call has to be first established on a loaded cell, before being
“exported” – It can be rejected
Easy to tune (dynamic process)
Adaptability to instantaneous and long term traffic modifications
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 246/331
© Alcatel 246
246@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> HO_MARGIN / LINK_FACTOR
> CHANGE STATICALLY TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION WITH HO:
• Ease outgoing better cell HO (to be tuned for a given couple ofcells)
– Decrease HO_MARGIN (can make a cell “candidate”)
– Increase LINK_FACTOR (used to rank candidate cells)
• Optimization method (repetitive process)
– Look for neighbor cells able to carry extra traffic
– Use Abis trace to check if these cells are candidate
– if yes, use LINK_FACTOR to favor them – if not, use HO_MARGIN and LINK_FACTOR
– Apply new values, check traffic, QoS indicators and possiblyspeech quality
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (6/12)
_
_
LINK_FACTORHO_MARGIN LINK_FACTOR
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 247/331
© Alcatel 247
247@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (7/12)
> The Pros and cons of LINK_FACTOR/HO_MARGIN
• Can be efficient (up to 20% increase of capacity) in some cases – Cell overlap
– Capacity of neighbor cells
Increase the number of HO/call
The call has to be first established on a loaded cell, before being“exported”
– It can be rejected
Heavy to tune (has to be done for each couple of cells)
No adaptability to instantaneous and long term traffic
modifications
Can be used to send traffic toward a cell external to the servingBSC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 248/331
© Alcatel 248
248@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> FREE_FACTOR/LOAD_FACTOR
> Taking into account the current load of cells, send the MS toward theless loaded cell with HO
• Ease outgoing better cell HO, according to
– Load_Factor (% of TCH occupancy) of serving and “target”cells
– Free_Factor (number of free TCHs) of serving and targetcells (order only)
– cannot make a “candidate” cell, only change ranking
• Tuning method (repetitive)
– to be activated locally for each cell with default parametersetting
– look for QoS indicators (esp. traffic intensity and blockingrate)
– tune tables accordingly
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (8/12)
oa _ actor
ree_ actor
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 249/331
© Alcatel 249
249@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (9/12)
> The Pros and cons of load/free factors method
Lower efficiency compared to LINK_FACTOR/HO_MARGIN
Calls have to be established on a loaded cell before being“exported”
Tuning is performed on a cell-per-cell basis
Cannot be used to send traffic toward an external cell
Adapted to dynamic change of traffic and capacity (for
Load_Factor)No increase of HO/call rate
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 250/331
© Alcatel 250
250@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Forced directed retry method
• Mechanisms – The MS is connected on an SDCCH of cell1
– It must switch on TCH
– No TCH is free on cell1
– There is at least 1 neighbor cell which has
– sufficient DL level seen by the MS
– enough free TCHs
– The MS is handed over to TCH towards this cell
– if there are several cells, the one with the best PBGT isselected
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (10/12)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 251/331
© Alcatel 251
251@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Method: trade-off between traffic and radio quality
• Mainly L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)parameter to tune
– the lower, the better thetraffic sharing
– the lower, the higher theinterference risks
• QoS indicators and field tests
(speech quality) are necessaryfor tuning
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (11/12)
C e l l 2 : 45
C e l l 3 : 2
3
C e
l l
1 :
2 4
> Forced directed retry
• The following condition is checked every measurement reporting period and if at least one input pre-processed parameterAV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is available.
– CAUSE = 20 (high level in neighbor cell for forced directed retry)
– AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) (n = 1 ... BTSnum)
– and EN_FORCED_DR = ENABLE
• The threshold L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is the observed level from the neighbor cell n at the border of the area whereforced directed retry is enabled. This threshold fixes the size of the overlapping area where forced directed retry can beperformed. It should be greater than RXLEVmin(n).
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 252/331
© Alcatel 252
252@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: Traffic Load Sharing (12/12)
> The Pros and cons of Forced directed retry
Highest efficiency (up to 30%)
No increase of HO/call rate
Can be used to send traffic toward an external cell
Adapted to dynamic change of traffic
Adapted to hierarchical networks, but also to standard ones
Tuning is performed on a cell-per-cell basis
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 253/331
© Alcatel 253
253@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Draw qualitatively the new serving areas on the pseudo mapwhen enabling traffic HO with:
– DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN=6dB
– DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN=4dB
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: training exercise (1/3)
Time allowed:5 minutes
PBGT(0) = 5
05 5
PBGT(0) PBGT(n)
PBGT(n) = 5
Traffic_load
Loaded cell 0 Unloaded cell n
EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 0
Cause 12Cause 12
DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN=
DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN=
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 254/331
© Alcatel 254
254@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: training exercise (2/3)
> What happens when EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = ENABLE andEN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) = DISABLE
Time allowed:5 minutes
QueuedAssignment
Request
PBGT(0) = 5
05 5
PBGT(0) PBGT(n)
PBGT(n) = 5
Traffic_load
Loaded cell 0 Unloaded cell n
Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82 dBm Av_Rxlev_Ncell(0) = -74 dBmAv_Rxlev_PBGT_HO = -82 dBm
L_RLEV_NCELL_DR(n) = -85 dBm
_ _ _ EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 255/331
© Alcatel 255
255@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
4.2 Examples and ExercisesExample 3: training exercise (3/3)
> What happens when EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = ENABLE andEN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) = ENABLE
QueuedAssignment
Request
PBGT(0) = 9
09 -1
PBGT(0) PBGT(n)
PBGT(n) = -1
Traffic_load
Loaded cell 0 Unloaded cell n
Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82 dBm Av_Rxlev_Ncell(0) = -74 dBmAv_Rxlev_PBGT_HO = -82 dBm
5 5
Time allowed:5 minutes
_ _ _ EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 256/331
© Alcatel 256
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 257/331
© Alcatel 257
257@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIESSession presentation
> Objective: to be able to propose a set of parameters to solve typicalradio problems
> Program:
5.1 Theoretical presentation
5.2 TUNNEL Case
5.3 RADAR Case
5.4 TOWER Case
5.5 RESURGENCE Case
5.6 FOREST Case
5.7 HIGHWAY Case
5.8 TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
S1: TYPICAL RADIO PROBLEMS
S2: ALGORITHMS AND ASSOCIATED PARAMETERS
S3: OMC-R RADIO PARAMETERS
S4: ALGORITHMS DYNAMIC BEHAVIOR
S5: CASE STUDIES
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 258/331
© Alcatel 258
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.1 Theoretical presentation
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 259/331
© Alcatel 259
259@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> SESSION OBJECTIVES
– Be able to propose an appropriate set of parameters
to solve typical field problems
> JUSTIFICATION
– Some typical problems due to particular field
configuration always occur in a GSM network
> DETAILED PROGRAM
– Eight typical case studies
5.1 Theoretical presentationSession objectives
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 260/331
© Alcatel 260
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.2 Tunnel Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 261/331
© Alcatel 261
261@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.2 Tunnel Case
> Radiating cable in a tunnel
Question:
Risks of such aconfiguration
Tune the rightparameters for thetunnel cell
Catch quickly‘car traffic’
Avoid thepedestrian traffic
Indoor BTS
Outdoor BTS
Pedestrianmobile
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 262/331
© Alcatel 262
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.3 Radar Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 263/331
© Alcatel 263
263@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.3 Radar Case
> Radar situation
• A “radar” cell situated on top of
a hill provides a wide coveragearea.
• An industrial zone in the valleyis covered by small cells but
also by the “radar” cell. Theserving areas in the IZ are notclearly defined.
> Objective
• Give a parameter set to preventthe radar cell from catching anytraffic in the industrial zone byHO assignment
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 264/331
© Alcatel 264
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.4 Tower Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 265/331
© Alcatel 265
265@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.4 Tower Case
> Tower situation
• The indoor mobile selects in idle mode the outdoorcell (same LA)
> Objective
• Define a set of parametersto avoid that effect
O utdoor ce l l
Indoorantenna
Indoormobile
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 266/331
© Alcatel 266
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.5 Resurgence Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 267/331
© Alcatel 267
267@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.5 Resurgence Case
> Resurgence situation
• In rural network,especially in hillylandscape, manyresurgences occurfrom very far cells.
> Objective
• Define a set ofparameters toavoid radio link
establishment tothose cells and
TCH traffic onthose cells
Cell A
Resurgencefrom cell A
Cell B
2 5 K m
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 268/331
© Alcatel 268
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.6 Forest Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 269/331
© Alcatel 269
269@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.6 Forest Case
> Forest situation: a highway crosses a forest
• High call drop rate (radio cause) on the cell and drivetests: strong level attenuation at the entrance of theforest
> Objective
• Define a set ofparameters to
avoid radio linkfailure
-75 dBm
-90 dBm
Forest(ATT = 10 dB every 100 m)
H i g
h w
a y
BTS
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 270/331
© Alcatel 270
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.7 Highway Case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 271/331
© Alcatel 271
271@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.7 Highway Case
> Highway situation:
• A highway is slightly covered(best coverage on 200m) by an‘orthogonal’ cell (cell C on the
map)
> Objective
• Define a set of parameters toavoid traffic in the ‘orthogonalcell’
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 272/331
© Alcatel 272
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5 CASE STUDIES
5.8 TCH/SDCCH congestion case
Theoretical presentation
TUNNEL Case
RADAR CaseTOWER Case
RESURGENCE Case
FOREST Case
HIGHWAY Case
TCH/SDCCH CONGESTION Case
INDOOR CELL CONGESTION Case
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 273/331
© Alcatel 273
273@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
5.8 TCH/SDCCH Congestion Case
> SDCCH congestion situation
• A railway station is located at the frontier of two LAs. Everytrain stopping in this station comes from LA 1 and thenreturn to LA 1 after the stop.
> Objective
• Define a set of parameters to avoidSDCCH congestion on cell B (LA 2)
L A f r o n t i e r
LA 1
LA 2
Cell A
Cell B
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 274/331
© Alcatel 274
274@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
END SESSION
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 275/331
© Alcatel 275
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
TYPICAL MODULE STRUCTURE
objective(s)
theoretical presentation
training exercises and/or cases study + feedback
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 276/331
© Alcatel 276
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
Annex.1 Erlang B law
Erlang B law
Frequency hopping influence on PCHO process
Load & Traffic evaluation
Training exercises solutions
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 277/331
© Alcatel 277
277@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang definition
> ERLANG: unit used to quantify traffic
• Example:
– 1 TCH is observed during 1 hour
– one can observe 1 call of 80 sec and 1 call of 100 sec
– the observed traffic is T = (80+100)/3600 = 0.05 ERLANG
Erlang definition
T =total observation duration
resource usage duration(Erlang)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 278/331
© Alcatel 278
278@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> ERLANG <-> CALL MIX
• CALL MIX EXAMPLE
– 350 call/hour
– 3 LU/call
– TCH duration: 85 sec
– SDCCH duration: 4.5 sec
• ERLANG COMPUTATION
– TCH = (350 * 85)/3600 = 8.26 ERLANG
– SDCCH = [ (350 + 350*3) * 4.5 ] / 3600 = 1.75 ERLANG
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCall mix definition
> 350 calls * 85 sec / 1 hour(3600 sec):
• TCH = (350 * 85)/3600 = 8.26 ERLANGS
> 350 calls means 350 SDCCH phases.
> 3 LU/call means 3 * 350 LUs so 1050 SDCCH phases more.
> 1 SDCCH phase is 4.5 sec:
• SDCCH = [ (350 + 350*3) * 4.5 ] / 3600 = 1.75 ERLANG
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 279/331
© Alcatel 279
279@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang B (1/5)
> ERLANG B LAW
• Relationship between – offered traffic
– number of resources
– blocking rate
> In a telecom system, call arrival frequency is ruled by the POISSON
LAW
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 970
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Call
Second
> The offered traffic is the traffic asked by the customers.
> The graph gives the number of connection requests per second during 35 seconds.
> 83/30s => 83 * 2 * 60 = about 10 000 / hour
> Real example in Paris on 1 BSC (LA FOURCHE).
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 280/331
© Alcatel 280
280@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang B (2/5)
> Call request arrival rate (and leaving) is not stable
• Number of resources = average number of requests * meanduration
• Is sometime not sufficient => probability of blocking
> => Erlang B law
• Pblock: blocking probability
• N: number of resources
• E: offered traffic [Erlang]
• Good approximation whenthe blocking rate is low (< 5%)
Pblock =ΣΣΣΣ
N
k=0E
k
k !
EN
N !
Erlang B law
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 281/331
© Alcatel 281
281@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> There is two different ways to use this law
• Using Abacus
• Using SW (here Excel)
– Pblock = f (T, Nc)
– Offered = f (Nc, Pblock)
– Channels = f (T, Pblock)
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang B (3/5)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 282/331
© Alcatel 282
282@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang B (4/5)
> Example:
We have a BTS of 8 TRXs (about 60 channels (Nc))
We do not want more than 2% of blocking (Pblock)
=> The traffic is not to be greater than 50 Erlangs (T)
• 83% of resources used to reach 2% of blocking
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 283/331
© Alcatel 283
283@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawErlang B (5/5)
> But be careful, the law is not linear:
• In B4, we use for example a combined BCCH with a micro BTS.
4 SDCCHs, Pblock = 2% => T = 1.1 E
25% of resources used to reach 2% of blocking
• In B5, if we decide to provide SMSCB (Cell Broadcast information)
1 subchannel SDCCH is therefore used.
3 SDCCHs, Pblock = 2% => T = 0.6 E
25% of resources less => 50% of Traffic less !!
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 284/331
© Alcatel 284
284@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CELL DIMENSIONING
• Given an Offered traffic, compute the number of TRXs (andSDCCHs) needed to carry it
• Default blocking rate
– RTCH: 2%
– SDCCH: 0.5%
– (TTCH: 0.1%)
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCell dimensioning (1/5)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 285/331
© Alcatel 285
285@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CELL DIMENSIONING
• To handle an offered traffic of 12 Erlangs (TCH), compute thenumber of channels, then the number of TRXs
• Channels (12;2%) = 19
• Example: 3 TRXs , 21 TCHs, 1 BCCH, 2 SDCCH8
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCell dimensioning (2/5)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 286/331
© Alcatel 286
286@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> CELL DIMENSIONING, based on field measurement
• One is measuring a traffic of 15 Erlangs, with a blocking rate of10%
• How to dimension the cell?
• Offered traffic = 15 / (1-10%) = 16.7 Erlangs !!!!
• Channels (16.7;2%) -> 25 TCHs -> 4 TRXs needed
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCell dimensioning (3/5)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 287/331
© Alcatel 287
287@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> FORECASTING TRAFFIC/CRITICAL TRAFFIC
• Traffic forecasting must be calculated according to offered traffic
not directly on measured traffic
• In order to plan necessary actions soon enough, one mustcalculate regularly the date when the traffic of a cell will becomecritical
• Critical traffic: when offered traffic will induce 2% of blocking
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCell dimensioning (4/5)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 288/331
© Alcatel 288
288@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawCell dimensioning (5/5)
> WARNING: in case of too high blocking rate
• First check that there is no outage on the BTS
• Before starting a dimensioning/tuning action
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 289/331
© Alcatel 289
289@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.1 Erlang B lawTraining exercise
> Training exercise
Complete this form in order to get less than 2% of blocking in allcases.
Erlang TCHoffered traffic
450 call/hourMean TCH call duration: 80 sec
Blocking rate TCH: 0.8%12,743 10.08 Erlang TCH
30% offered trafficincrease
13.1 Erlang TCH -> 20 TCH3 TRX
Call mix infoCell Traffic forecast Proposed configuration
12,675
12,865
330 call/hourMean TCH call duration: 129 sec
Blocking rate TCH: 4%
600 call/hourMean TCH call duration: 96 sec
Blocking rate TCH: 8%
30% offered trafficincrease
30% offered trafficincrease
cellcellcellcell callcallcallcall mix infomix infomix infomix info Erlang TCHErlang TCHErlang TCHErlang TCH traffictraffictraffictraffic forecastforecastforecastforecast proposedproposedproposedproposed configconfigconfigconfig
12, 743 450 call/hourmean TCH call duration : 80secblocking rate TCH : 0.8%
10 Erlang TCH
(450*80)/3600=1010/.992=10.081
30 % TCH increase
10,081*1.3=13.1
13,1 Erlang TCH - > 20TCH
3 TRX
12,675 330 call/hour
mean TCH call duration 129secblocking rate 4%
(330*129)/360
0=11.825/0.96=12.3177
30 % TCH increase
12.3177*1.3 =16
16 Erlang TCH -> 24 TCH
4 TRX
12,865 600 call/hourmean TCH call duration 96secblocking rate 8 %
(600*96)/3600=16/.92 = 17.4
30 % TCH increase
17.4*1.3 = 22.6
22.6 Erlang TCH -> 31 TCH
5 TRX
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 290/331
© Alcatel 290
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
Annex.2 Frequency Hopping influenceon PCHO process
Erlang B law
Frequency hopping influence on PCHO process
Load & Traffic evaluation
Training exercises solutions
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 291/331
© Alcatel 291
291@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHOprocess(1/4)> Signal decoding process
• In a GSM system, the number of frames that are not erased aresent as an input to the voice decoder
Inside the mobile station
Decoder
Encoder
DeinterleaveError Correction
Frame ErasureDecision
RXQUAL Frame Erasure Rate
Demod.Voice
Decoder
Air
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 292/331
© Alcatel 292
292@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Quality impact of frequency hopping on the reception chain
• In non-hopping networks, the RXQUAL and voice quality arecorrelated
• In hopping networks, the voice quality is sooner correlated to theFER. This is due to interferer averaging and due to the non-linearmapping of BER to RXQUAL values.
Annex.2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHOprocess(2/4)
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 293/331
© Alcatel 293
293@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Quality impact of frequency hopping on the reception chain
• FER is improved when frequency hopping is activated (cyclic orrandom)
• RxQual is not impacted whereas the speech quality is better
Annex.2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHOprocess(3/4)
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
RxQ Average
0.00%
0.50%
1.00%
1.50%
2.00%
2.50%
FER Average
Ref Cyclic RandomRxQ AverageFER Average
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 294/331
© Alcatel 294
294@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Conclusion
• When frequency hopping is activated
• We can accept in Power Control and Handover processes, athreshold increase:
– OFFSET_HOPPING_PC and
– OFFSET_HOPPING_HO
Annex.2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHOprocessConclusion (4/4)
OFFSET_HOPPING_PC
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 295/331
© Alcatel 295
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluation
Erlang B law
Frequency hopping influence on PCHO process
Load & Traffic evaluation
Training exercises solutions
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 296/331
© Alcatel 296
296@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationCell TCH radio resource evaluation usage
FREEfactorLOADfactor
Loadevaluation
Speed discrimination for hierarchical networkFull Rate/Half Rate channel allocation
Power budget HandoverTraffic Handover
Multiband capture HandoverGeneral capture Handover
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Shortterm
Mediumterm
Longterm
LOAD_EV_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD
TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Period Usage
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 297/331
© Alcatel 297
297@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationLoad evaluation (1/5)
Nb of free TCHsLOADfactorsFREEfactors
Load evaluation
TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Non-sliding average
> Medium term measurement of the load of a cell
• Corresponds to function AV_LOAD(cell)
• A new sample of the “Nb free TCH” in the cell is available every
TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds
• AV_LOAD() is a non-sliding window load average from Nb free
TCH samples updated every LOAD_EV_PERIOD xTCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
LOAD_EV_PERIOD
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 298/331
© Alcatel 298
298@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationLoad evaluation (2/5)
> AV_LOAD(cell n) calculated from N Nb free TCH samples available
during LOAD_EV_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
• LOADfactors and FREEfactors also determined from Nb free TCHsamples every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds (short term
evaluation)• LOADlevels are boundaries of load intervals associating a
LOADfactor (db) to a Nb of free TCH samples
• FREElevels are boundaries of Nb of free TCH intervalsassociating a FREEfactor (db) to a Nb of free TCH samples
AV_LOADdefinition
AV_LOAD =Nsamples
1ΣΣΣΣ
Nsamples
i = 1
(1 -Nb total TCH (n)
Nb free TCH (n)) x 100
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 299/331
© Alcatel 299
299@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationLoad evaluation (3/5)
> LOADfactor determination:
• LOADlevel in %
• LOADfactor in dB
LOADfactor
LOADfactor_1
LOADfactor_2
LOADfactor_3
LOADfactor_4
LOADfactor_5
t = (1 - Nb free TCH/Total Nb TCH) x 100
t <= LOADlevel_1
LOADlevel_1 < t <= LOADlevel_2
LOADlevel_2 < t <= LOADlevel_3
LOADlevel_3 < t <= LOADlevel_4
LOADlevel_4 < t
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 300/331
© Alcatel 300
300@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationLoad evaluation (4/5)
> FREEfactor determination:
• FREElevel in absolute number of TCH
• FREEfactor in dB
FREEfactor
FREEfactor_1
FREEfactor_2
FREEfactor_3
FREEfactor_4
FREEfactor_5
Nb free TCH
t <= FREElevel_1
FREElevel_1 < t <= FREElevel_2
FREElevel_2 < t <= FREElevel_3
FREElevel_3 < t <= FREElevel_4
FREElevel_4 < t
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 301/331
© Alcatel 301
301@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationLoad evaluation (5/5)
> Example: cells with 4 TRXs (28 TCHs)
In cell evaluation of cell n for outgoing HO from cell 0:
• In GRADE(n): + LOADfactor(n) = +0 = 0 dB
• In ORDER(n): + FREEfactor(n) – FREEfacfor(0) = +7 – (-8) = +15dB
LOADfactor+10 dB
+5 dB
0 dB
-10 dB
-15 dB
Load = (1 - Nb free TCH/Total Nb TCH) x 100t <= 10%
10% < t <= 25%
25% < t <= 50%
50% < t <= 80%
80% < t
FREEfactor-16 dB
-8 dB
0 dB
+7 dB
+10 dB
Nb free TCHt <= 3
3 < t <= 8
8 < t <= 15
15 < t <= 21
21 < t
Cell nCell 0
HO ?Nb free TCHs = 4Load = 85.7%
LOADfactor(0) = -15 dBmFREEfactor(0) = -8 dBm
Nb free TCHs = 20Load = 28.6%
LOADfactor(n) = 0 dBmFREEfactor(n) = +7 dBm
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 302/331
© Alcatel 302
302@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationTraffic evaluation (1/4)
> Long term measurement of the load of a cell
• Corresponds to function Traffic_load(cell)
• Traffic_load() value is determined from a number
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD of consecutive non-sliding window loadaverages AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD calculated from Nb of free TCHsamples updated every A_TRAFFIC_LOAD xTCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
Nb of free TCHsLOADfactorsFREEfactors
Traffic evaluation
TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
(N_TRAFFIC_LOAD non-sliding average)
TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
_TRAFFIC_LOAD
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 303/331
© Alcatel 303
303@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationTraffic evaluation (2/4)
• 3 possible values for Traffic_load(): high , low , indefinite
• Initialization: Traffic_load() = indefinite
• Traffic_load() becomes:
– High if the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD consecutive
AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load averages are all greater thanHIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD threshold
– Low if the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD consecutiveAV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load averages are all lower thanLOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD threshold
Traffic loadThresolds comparisonwith N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
averages
AV_TRAFFIC_LOADAveraging onA_TRAFFIC_LOAD
load samples
Load samples
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
_ _
_ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 304/331
© Alcatel 304
304@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
• Traffic_load() becomes indefinite if:
– Traffic_load() was high and the last AV_TRAFFIC_LOADload average is lower than LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD (orIND_TRAFFIC_LOAD if not 0%)
– Traffic_load() was low and the last AV_TRAFFIC_LOADload average is greater than HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD (orIND_TRAFFIC_LOAD if not 0%)
• Traffic_load(n) is always equal to indefinite if cell n is external toBSC
• HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD ≥ IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD ≥LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationTraffic evaluation (3/4)
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD _ _
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD _ _
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD ≥ IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD ≥ _ _
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 305/331
© Alcatel 305
305@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.3 Load & Traffic evaluationTraffic evaluation (4/4)
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Variation ofAV_TRAFFIC_LOAD
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Traffic_load = high
Traffic_load =indefinite
Traffic_load =indefinite
Traffic_load = low Traffic_load = low
Traffic_load =indefinite
Traffic_load =indefinite
Traffic_load = high
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <> 0
> Example with N_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 3
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 306/331
© Alcatel 306
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
Annex.4 Handover Management
Erlang B law
Frequency hopping influence on PCHO process
Load & Traffic evaluation
Training exercises solutions
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 307/331
© Alcatel 307
307@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Handover Management made up of:
• Cell Filtering Process (according to call history)
• Handover Decision (according to the best cell in the list)
> Handover Management followed by:
• Handover Protocol
Annex.4 Handover ManagementPrinciples
Radio
Link
Measurements
Active
Channel
Pre-processing
BTS BSC
HO Detection HO Candidate
Cell Evaluation
HO
management
MSC
HO
protocol
HO Preparation
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 308/331
© Alcatel 308
308@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.4 Handover ManagementGlobal Handover Process
Handover preparation
Handoverdetection
Handover management
Cellfilteringprocess
Handover protocol
Externalor internalchannelchange
Candidatecell
evaluation
Handoverdecision
Raw cell list
Ordered target
cell list
Filtered target
cell list
Execution target
cell list
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 309/331
© Alcatel 309
309@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> Three cell lists:
• Ordered target Cell list
– target cells provided by Candidate Cell Evaluation
• REJ_CELL_LIST
– cells internally rejected by the MSC or BSC
• MS_CELL_REJ_LIST
– cells to which the MS failed to hand over
Annex.4 Handover ManagementCell Lists usage
> Since B6 release, some changes have been provided to the HO management process which is in charge of the HO executiontriggering, when the need of handover is detected by the HO preparation process.
> These changes are :
• use of the T_FILTER parameter in a different way than for B5,
• the parameter NBR_HO_ATTEMPTS which was used for internal HO in B5 is removed,
• use of the T7 parameter and of the REJ_CELL_LIST list also for internal HO in B7,
• same behavior in case of internal and external HO in B7,
• immediate attempt after rejection or failure without waiting for a new alarm in case of internal and external HO in B7,
• implicit rejection of cells in B7 with the help of the target cell identity in the HO command received from the MSC.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 310/331
© Alcatel 310
310@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> T_FILTER: controls the global handover procedure
• started: when a cell list is to be sent by Candidate Cell Evaluation
• expiry⇒ empty target cell list sent to the Handover Management
> T7: controls the clean-up of REJ_CELL_LIST
• started: when a target cell list is to be sent to Handover Protocol
• expiry⇒ empty REJ_CELL_LIST
> T_MS_CELL_REJ: clean-up of MS_CELL_REJ_LIST
• started: when an MS reports a failure to seize the target channel
• expiry⇒ empty MS_CELL_REJ_LIST
> T_HO_REQ_LOST: to supervise answer of MSC (no HANDOVERREQUIRED REJECT message sent)
• Started: HO REQUIRED sent
• Stopped: HO COMMAND received
• Expiry⇒ external channel change procedure is terminated.
Annex.4 Handover ManagementTimers usage
> If the candidate cell list provided by the candidate cell evaluation process is different from the previous one (the number of cells isdifferent or same number of cells but new cells in the list), an alarm is sent to the HOM process. In B7, if T_FILTER expires, itmeans that the HO is no more necessary.
> For both internal and external HOs in case of HO failure from the MS, the cell is filtered until the expiry of the T_MS_CELL_REJtimer. When the T_MS_CELL_REJ timer expires, the rejected cell may be a candidate.
> In B7 release, T7 timer is used to manage the REJ_CELL_LIST list and a subsequent HO REQUIRED can be sent to the MSCbefore T7 expiry if the target cell list has changed (new cell or removed cell).
> The REJ_CELL_LIST list is used for both internal and external Hos.
> T_HO_REQD_LOST Expiry
• This timer is used to supervise response from the MSC. It is started when sending the first HANDOVER REQUIRED to theMSC and it is stopped in the following cases:
• when HANDOVER COMMAND is received from the MSC or
> when HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT is received from the MSC only if the same number of HANDOVERREQUIRED REJECT messages have been received from the MSC than the number of HANDOVER REQUIRED messages sentto the MSC for this channel change procedure) (i.e. no message crossing over A interface).
• In case where more HANDOVER REQUIRED messages have been sent to the MSC, the timer T_HO_REQD_LOST isnot stopped upon HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT receipt, as there is no way for the BSC to know if the receivedHANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT is a response to the last HANDOVER REQUIRED message or a response to aprevious one (message crossing over A interface).
• On expiry, an O&M error report is raised only when no message has been received from the MSC since the lastHANDOVER REQUIRED message, and the external channel change procedure is terminated.
_FILTER
_MS_CELL_REJ
_HO_REQ_LOST:
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 311/331
© Alcatel 311
311@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.4 Handover ManagementHandover Execution Process
Handover preparation
Cell filtering process
remove cells previously rejectedfrom MSC or BSC
remove cells previously rejectedfor MS failure reason
remove cells not suitable due toO&M reason
Filtered target
cell list
Cell 4
Cell 2
Cell 8
Filtered target
cell list
Cell 2
InternalHandover
InternalHandover
Handover protocol
Handover decision
Relevant handover protocol ischosen according to the type ofGSM procedure ongoing and thefirst target cell of the list
T7 is started
List of cells previously rejected
for MS failure
Cell 8
MS_CELL_REJ_LIST listcleared atT_MS_CELL_REJ expiry
List of cells previously rejected from MSC or BSC
Cell 4
REJ_CELL_LIST listcleared at T7 expiry
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 312/331
© Alcatel 312
312@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.4 Handover ManagementHO execution example
Handover management
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Rejected lists
MS emptyBSC/MSC empty
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Update
Cell 1 -> MS
rejected list
Handover management
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Rejected lists
MS cell 1BSC/MSC empty
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Handover protocol
HO failson cell 2
ROC
Update
T_MS_CELL_REJexpires
MS rejected listempty
Update
Cell 2 -> MSrejected list
Cell 1 -> BSCrejected list
Handover management
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Rejected lists
MS cell 2BSC/MSC cell 1
Ordered target cell list
Cell 1Cell 2Cell 3
Handover
protocol
HO tocell 3
Handover protocol
HO fails
on cell 1
ROC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 313/331
© Alcatel 313
313@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
> End of Handover procedure = T_FILTER timer expiry
• T_FILTER restarted each time a target cell list is to be sent by
Candidate Cell Evaluation to the Handover Management (same
list than the one previously sent or not)
• The target cell list is sent to the Handover Management if
different from the last target cell list previously sent
• T_FILTER expiry means no handover is needed anymore
Annex.4 Handover ManagementT_FILTER controls HO procedure (1/2)
T_FILTER
_
_
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 314/331
© Alcatel 314
314@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.4 Handover ManagementT_FILTER controls HO procedure (2/2)
Is T_FILTER running?
YesNo
Restart T_FILTER
New candidate cell list from thecandidate cell evaluation function
Start T_FILTER:an HO alarm containing thecandidate cell is sent to the
HO management entity
YesNo
Is the candidate cell list different from the previous one?
Restart T_FILTER:an HO alarm containing thecandidate cell is sent to the
HO management entity
No Handover is on-going A Handover is on-going
A Handover is now on-going
T_FILTER is restartedeach time the alarm is still on
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 315/331
© Alcatel 315
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
ANNEXES
Annex.5 LCS
Erlang B law
Frequency hopping influence on PCHO process
Load & Traffic evaluation
Training exercises solutions
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 316/331
© Alcatel 316
316@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSDefinitions
> New end-user services which provide the geographical location of an
MS:
– On MS request to know its own location
– On network request (especially during Emergency calls)
– On external request (LCS Client)
> Several positioning methods:
– Cell-ID or Cell-ID + TA (Timing Advance)
– Conventional (standalone) GPS
– Assisted GPS (with A-GPS server help to compute location)
– MS-based (MB): the MS is able to perform a pre-computation
– MS-assisted (MA): the MS sends info, Networkcomputes
> Assisted GPS Method:
• Mobile-based: The MS performs OTD signal measurements and computes its own location estimate. In this case, the
network provides the MS with the additional information such as BTS coordinates and the RTD values. These assistancedata can be either broadcast on the CBCH (using SMSCB function) or provided by the BSS in a point-to-point connection(either spontaneously or on request from the MS).
• Mobile-assisted: The MS performs and reports OTD signal measurements to the network and the network computes theMS’s location estimate.
• With
– OTD: Observed Time Difference: the time interval that is observed by an MS between the receptions of signals(bursts) from two different BTSs.
– RTD: Real Time Difference: This means the relative synchronization difference in the network between two BTSs.
> Finally, 4 methods are possible for positioning:
• Cell ID+ TA,
– This is the simplest method for determining the location of a mobile. It relies on the hypothesis that the geographicalcoverage of a cell corresponds to that predicted by radio coverage studies. When an active mobile is connected to abase station, the mobile is assumed to be located geographically within the area predicted to be best served by thisbase station
• Conventional (MS equipped with GPS System),
• MS-based Assisted GPS,
• MS-Assisted GPS.
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 317/331
© Alcatel 317
317@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS architecture
> LCS function: Architecture MS Request1
Network Request2
External Request3
A-GPSGMLCLCS
SMLC
: Assisted GPS: Gateway Mobile Location Center: Location Services
: Serving Mobile Location Center
BTS
Abis
MFS
BTS
OSP
SMLC
A-GPSserver
GPS receiversreference network
GMLCExternal
LCS client
MSCBSC
HLR
Abis
A Lg Le
Lh
Lb
Emergency call
2 3
SAGI
Where is the accident?
Where is my son?
Wheream I?
1
SMLC function integrated in MFS: - receives the location request from the GMLC through the MSC/BSC - schedules all the necessary actions to get MS location - computes MS location - provides the result back to the GMLC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 318/331
© Alcatel 318
318@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS Positionning procedure
BTS
MFS
BTS
OSP
SMLC
GMLCMSC
BSC
HLR
Locationrequest
1
Routinginformation
2
Providesubscriber
location
3
Paging,authentication,
ciphering,notification
4
Providesubscriber location
5
Individualpositioning
6 Location report7 7
Locationresponse
8
> If the MS is in idle mode, the MSC first performs a CS paging, authentication and ciphering in order to establish an SDCCH withthe MS. The MS subscriber is not aware of it, i.e. no ringing tone, except towards GPRS MS in Packet Transfer Mode which maysuspend its GPRS traffic in order to answer to the CS Paging (i.e. not fully transparent for the subscriber).
>> When the MS is in dedicated mode (after a specific SDCCH establishment for location, or during an on-going call), the MSC sends
the location request to BSC in the existing SCCP connection for the current call, which forwards it to the SMLC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 319/331
© Alcatel 319
319@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS protocol (1/2)
BSCSMLC(MFS)
Um Lb
L1-GSL
L2-GSL
BSSLAP
L2-GSL
BSSAP-LE
L1-GSLL1
L2(LAPDm)
RR
Relay
RRLP(04.31)
BSSLAP(08.71)
BSSAP-LE(09.31)
Target MS
L1
RR(04.18)
L2(LAPDm)
RRLP(04.31)
Signaling Protocols between the MS (CS domain) and the SMLC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 320/331
© Alcatel 320
320@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS protocol (2/2)
> Example: Mobile terminated location request success (External request)
MS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR
Adequate positioning method
chosen by SMLC withoptional additional scenario
StartsT_Location
StopT_Location
LCS Service Request
Send_Routing_Info request
Send_Routing_Info response
Provide_Subscriber_Location
Authentication + Ciphering
BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Request
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response
BSSMAP Perform_Location_Response
Provide_Subscriber_Location Result
LCS Service Response
MSSMAP Clear Command and Release
LCS client
Paging
> T_location_Longer used in case of optional additional scenario (see graph):
Upon receipt of the MS POSITION COMMAND message from the SMLC (optional additional scenario), the BSC stops theT_Location timer, and starts instead the T_Location_Longer timer. This timer is stopped only at the end of the location
procedure in the BSC, i.e. when an 08.08 PERFORM LOCATION RESPONSE message is sent back to the MSC.> Aborts:
• Abort by MSC
Depending on the location procedure and its current state of execution, upon PERFORM LOCATION ABORT messagereceipt, the BSC sends immediately to the MSC a PERFORM LOCATION RESPONSE message (when no exchangeon the Lb interface is on-going), or to the SMLC either a PERFORM LOCATION ABORT or an ABORT message. TheBSC starts the timer T_Loc_abort to supervise the SMLC response.
• Abort by BSS
If an ongoing location request is interrupted at the BSC level for the following reasons:
– by an inter-BSC handover, or
– if the main signaling link to the target MS is lost or released, or
– the SCCP connection on the A interface is released, or
– if the timer T_Location expires,
the BSC must send either a PERFORM LOCATION ABORT message or a ABORT message to the SMLC and starts thetimer T_Loc_abort
> The useful B8 content of the received PERFORM LOCATION REQUEST message is:
• Location type,
• Classmark information 3,
• Requested QoS: provides service requirement concerning geographic positioning and response time
– accuracy, the response time category (Low Delay or Delay Tolerant),
• Current Cell Id + TA information are always provided to the SMLC.
> The time of transfer of the assitance data on the SDCCH is estimated about 14s for a 1000 octets information,
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 321/331
© Alcatel 321
321@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSPositioning methods : CI+TA positioning
> Principles of CI + TA Positioning Method
LCS_LONGITUDE
LCS_LATITUDE
LCS_AZIMUTH(Main Beam Directiongiven by the azimuth)
HALF P W R _B E A M _W
I D T H
S
e r v i n g c e l l ( C I )
TA
3dB pointgiven by the azimuth
and the HPBW
3dB pointgiven by the azimuth
and the HPBW
5 5 3 m
MSestimated location
> With the TA positioning method, no signalling exchange is required between the SMLC and the MS (i.e. RRLP protocol is notrequired). The TA positioning method is applicable to all the MSs (supporting LCS or not).
> Based on:
• Cell Identity (CI) of the serving cell and• Timing Advance (TA) value reported by MS
intersection point of a line from the BTS antenna in their main direction with a circle which radius is corresponding with thepropagation delay (timing advance) is the MS estimated position
Omni-directional cells: MS position = site position
> Parameters:
> EN_LCS – flag to enable/disable the Location Services per BSS
• 0 = Enabled; 1= Disabled; Default = 0
IF EN_LCS=1, CI+TA method is enabled in all the BSS cells
• LCS_LATITUDE
– Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell
• LCS_LONGITUDE
– Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell
• LCS_AZIMUTH
– Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell
• HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
– Antenna half power beamwidth for the sector supporting the cell
> Optimization parameters:• ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
– Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computinglocation estimate based on TA positioning method.
• MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
– Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computinglocation estimate based on TA positioning method
• MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
– Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computinglocation estimate based on TA positioning method
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 322/331
© Alcatel 322
322@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSPositioning methods : Conventional GPS
> Conventional GPS location procedure
• This optional location procedure is chosen by the SMLC (ifthe MS support it) upon reception of a Perform LocationRequest message from the BSC
Perform Location Request
MS BTS BSC SMLC
Measurement Position Request
Measurement Position Response (X,Y)
Perform Location
Response (X,Y) (X,Y):
computed position
(X,Y)
LocationRequest
LocationResponse
• The MS continiously computes its position
• Terminal searches for satellites, acquires all the GPS data, computes its own position and finally provides the locationestimation to the SMLC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 323/331
© Alcatel 323
323@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSPositioning method : Assisted GPS Positioning 1/3
> Assisted GPS Positioning Method (A-GPS)
• Assistance GPS Positioning Method is split into:
– MS Based A-GPS method
– MS Assisted A-GPS method
- GPS acquisition assistance- Navigation model (almanac, ephemeris)- Ionospheric model- Time integrity
GPS MS A-GPSserver
GPS receiversreference network
Assistance data on request
> Assistance data gathered from a GPS reference network receiver is broadcasted to the GPS MS
> Flags/Parameters
• EN_LCS = 1
• EN_MS_BASED_AGPS – enables/disables the positioning method MS Based A-GPS per CELL
– 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled; default = 0
• EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS – enables/disables the positioning method MS Assisted A-GPS per CELL
– 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled; default = 0
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 324/331
© Alcatel 324
324@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSPositioning method : Assisted GPS Positioning 2/3
> A-GPS location procedure / MS Based A-GPS
Perform Location Request
MS BTS BSC SMLC
LocationRequest
A-GPS
Server
GPS info Request
GPS info Response
Measurement Position Request
Assistance Data
Assistance Data Acknowledge
Measurement Position Response (X,Y)
Perform Location
Response (X,Y)
LocationResponse
PositionRequest
PositionResponse
AssistanceData
(X,Y)
(X,Y):computed position
Positioning calculation:latitude, longitude
and altitude
> Using assistance data, MS computes by itself the position and sends it back to the SMLC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 325/331
© Alcatel 325
325@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSPositioning method : Assisted GPS Positioning 3/3
> A-GPS location procedure / MS Assisted A-GPS
(X,Y):computed position
Pseudo-rangemeasurements (M)
Position
Response
Perform Location Request
MS BTS BSC SMLC
LocationRequest
A-GPSServer
GPS info Request
GPS info Response
Measurement Position Request
Assistance Data
Assistance Data Acknowledge
Perform Location
Response (X,Y)
LocationResponse
PositionRequest
AssistanceData
(X,Y)
Measurement Position Response (M)
GPS Location Request (M)
GPS Location Response (X,Y)
• Using a reduced set of assistance data, the MS makes pseudo–range measurements and sends the result to the A-
GPS server, which fixes the position in the end
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 326/331
© Alcatel 326
326@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS impact on HO 1/3
> HO preparation
• Inhibition of “better cell handovers”
• Other HOMS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR
StartsT_Location
EmergencyHO
detection
LCS Service Request
Send_Routing_Info request
Send_Routing_Info response
Provide_Subscriber_Location
Authentication + Ciphering
BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Request
LCS client
Paging
BSSLAP - Reset
– HO needed during LCS procedure
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 327/331
© Alcatel 327
327@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS impact on HO 2/3
> HO management
• Internal HO
MS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR
HOcomplete
BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response
LCS client
BSSLAP - Reset
Intra BSCHO
on going
BSSMAP perform location response (cause = "Intra-BSC Handover Complete)
– Mobile in communication
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 328/331
© Alcatel 328
328@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSLCS impact on HO 2/3
> HO management
• External HO
MS BTS Serving BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR
ExternalBSC HO
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Abort
LCS client
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response
BSSMAP HO required
BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 329/331
© Alcatel 329
329@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSBSS Parameters
Timers
T_Location
T_Location_longer
T_Loc_Abort
T_LCS_delay_tolerant
T_LCS_LowDelay
T_RRLP_low_delay
T_RRLP_delay_tolerant
FLAGS
EN_LCS
EN_SAGI
OPTIMIZATION DATA
ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
> BSS PARAMETERS
– EN_LCS (BSC)
– Flag which enables or disables the LCS feature in the BSS. – EN_SAGI – Flag indicating whether SAGI is configured or not for this BSS
– T_Location: – BSC timer on a per call basis to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Request, when no RRLP
exchange is triggered with the MS. – T_Location_longer:
– BSC timer on a per call basis to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Request, when an RRLPexchange is triggered with the MS. Replace T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS-Assisted A-GPS, MS-Based A-GPS.
– T_Loc_Abort – BSC timer to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Abort.
– T_LCS_LowDelay – SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the
target MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request. – T_LCS_DelayTolerant
– SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the
target MS) in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. – T_LCS_LowDelay
– SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with thetarget MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request.
– T_RRLP_Low_delay – Timer to guard the RRLP exchange between the SMLC and the MS .
– T_RRLP_delay_tolerant – Timer to guard the RRLP exchange between the SMLC and the MS.
• Optimization data:
• ARC_SIZE_FACTOR – Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing
location estimate based on TA positioning method.• MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
– Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computinglocation estimate based on TA positioning method
• MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR – Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing
location estimate based on TA positioning method
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 330/331
© Alcatel 330
330@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSCell Parameters
SITE DATA
LCS_LATITUDE
LCS_LONGITUDE
LCS_SIGNIFICANT_GC
LCS_AZIMUTH
HALF_POWER_BANDWIDTH
EN_CONV_GPS
EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
FLAGS
> CELL PARAMETERS
• EN_CONV_GPS – Flag to enable/disable the Conventional GPS positioning method.• EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
– Flag to enable/disable the MS Assisted A-GPS positioning method.• EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
– Flag to enable/disable the MS Based A-GPS positioning method.• LCS_LATITUDE
– Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA posit ioningmethod).
• LCS_LONGITUDE – Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positioning
method).• LCS_SIGNIFICANT_GC
– Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not• LCS_AZIMUTH
– Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimatebased on TA positioning method).
• HALF_POWER_BANDWIDTH – Half power beam width of the antenna for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location
estimate based on TA positioning method).
• Remark: To have LCS supported for a cell, the operator must activate LCS on the BSS handling this cell but he must alsoactivate GPRS for this cell (i.e. setting of MAX_PDCH to a value > 0, the cell being kept locked for GPRS if the operatordoes not want to have GPRS running on this cell) and configure all the required transmission resources (Ater and Gbresources) on the GPU(s) connected to this BSC
8/11/2019 Radio Fine Tuning_B9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/radio-fine-tuningb9 331/331
© Alcatel 331
331@Introduction to Radio Fine TuningBSS Release B9
All rights reserved © 2004, Alcatel
Annex.5 LCSExercise
> Where is implemented the SMLC function?
> What are the LCS impacts on cell dimensioning?
Time allowed:
10 minutes